JVC Car Stereo System KD LH401 User Manual
SERVICE MANUAL  
CD RECEIVER  
M240A00463  
KD-LH401  
Area suffix  
E ----------- Continental Europe  
EX --------------- Central Europe  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
1
2
3
4
5
PRECAUTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28  
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29  
COPYRIGHT © 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
No.MA063  
2004/4  
SECTION 1  
PRECAUTION  
1.1 Safety Precautions  
Burrs formed during molding may be left over on some parts of the chassis. Therefore,  
pay attention to such burrs in the case of preforming repair of this system.  
!
Please use enough caution not to see the beam directly or touch it in case of an  
adjustment or operation check.  
!
(No.MA063)1-3  
 
1.2 Preventing static electricity  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), which occurs when static electricity stored in the body, fabric, etc. is discharged, can destroy the laser  
diode in the traverse unit (optical pickup). Take care to prevent this when performing repairs.  
1.2.1 Grounding to prevent damage by static electricity  
Static electricity in the work area can destroy the optical pickup (laser diode) in devices such as laser products.  
Be careful to use proper grounding in the area where repairs are being performed.  
(1) Ground the workbench  
Ground the workbench by laying conductive material (such as a conductive sheet) or an iron plate over it before placing the  
traverse unit (optical pickup) on it.  
(2) Ground yourself  
Use an anti-static wrist strap to release any static electricity built up in your body.  
(caption)  
Anti-static wrist strap  
1M  
Conductive material  
(conductive sheet) or iron plate  
(3) Handling the optical pickup  
• In order to maintain quality during transport and before installation, both sides of the laser diode on the replacement optical  
pickup are shorted. After replacement, return the shorted parts to their original condition.  
(Refer to the text.)  
• Do not use a tester to check the condition of the laser diode in the optical pickup. The tester's internal power source can easily  
destroy the laser diode.  
1.3 Handling the traverse unit (optical pickup)  
(1) Do not subject the traverse unit (optical pickup) to strong shocks, as it is a sensitive, complex unit.  
(2) Cut off the shorted part of the flexible cable using nippers, etc. after replacing the optical pickup. For specific details, refer to the  
replacement procedure in the text. Remove the anti-static pin when replacing the traverse unit. Be careful not to take too long a  
time when attaching it to the connector.  
(3) Handle the flexible cable carefully as it may break when subjected to strong force.  
(4) It is not possible to adjust the semi-fixed resistor that adjusts the laser power. Do not turn it.  
1.4 Attention when traverse unit is decomposed  
*Please refer to "Disassembly method" in the text for the pickup unit.  
• Apply solder to the short land before the flexible wire is disconnected from the connector on the pickup unit.  
(If the flexible wire is disconnected without applying solder, the pickup may be destroyed by static electricity.)  
• In the assembly, be sure to remove solder from the short land after connecting the flexible wire.  
Short-circuit point  
(Soldering)  
Flexible wire  
Pickup  
1-4 (No.MA063)  
1.5 Important for laser products  
5.CAUTION : If safety switches malfunction, the laser is able  
to function.  
1.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2.DANGER : Invisible laser radiation when open and inter  
lock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
3.CAUTION : There are no serviceable parts inside the  
Laser Unit. Do not disassemble the Laser Unit. Replace  
the complete Laser Unit if it malfunctions.  
6.CAUTION : Use of controls, adjustments or performance of  
procedures other than those specified here in may result in  
hazardous radiation exposure.  
4.CAUTION : The CD,MD and DVD player uses invisible  
laser radiation and is equipped with safety switches which  
prevent emission of radiation when the drawer is open and  
the safety interlocks have failed or are defeated. It is  
dangerous to defeat the safety switches.  
Please use enough caution not to  
!
see the beam directly or touch it  
in case of an adjustment or operation  
check.  
REPRODUCTION AND POSITION OF LABELS  
WARNING LABEL  
CAUTION  
:
Visible and Invisible ADVARSEL : Synlig og usynlig VARNING  
:
Synlig och VARO : Avattaessa ja suojalukitus  
laser radiation when open and laserstråling når maskinen er osynling laserstrålning när ohitettuna tai viallisena olet alttiina  
interlock failed or defeated. åben eller interlocken fejeler. den öppnas och spärren är näkyvälle ja näkymättömälle  
CLASS 1  
LASER PRODUCT  
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO Undgå direkte eksponering til urkopplad. Betrakta ej  
BEAM. (e) stråling. (d) strålen. (s)  
lasersäteilylle. Vältä säteen  
kohdistumista suoraan itseesi. (f)  
(No.MA063)1-5  
SECTION 2  
SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS  
This service manual does not describe SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS.  
1-6 (No.MA063)  
 
SECTION 3  
DISASSEMBLY  
3.1 Main body section  
3.1.1 Removing the front panel assembly  
(See Fig.1)  
(1) Push the detach button in the lower right part of the front  
panel assembly.  
Front panel assembly  
(2) Remove the front panel assembly.  
Detach button  
Fig.1  
3.1.2 Removing the heat sink  
(See Fig.2)  
(1) From the left side of the main body, remove the two screws  
A and three screws B attaching the heat sink.  
A
B
A
Heat sink  
Fig.2  
(No.MA063)1-7  
 
3.1.3 Removing the top chassis assembly  
(See Figs.3 to 6)  
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the heat  
sink.  
Bottom chassis assembly  
Reference:  
Remove the front panel assembly as required.  
(1) From the bottom side of the main body, remove the two  
screws C attaching the top chassis assembly to the bottom  
chassis assembly. (See Fig.3.)  
(2) From the both and rear sides of the main body, remove the  
four screws D attaching the top chassis assembly to the  
bottom chassis assembly. (See Figs.4 to 6.)  
(3) Lift the top chassis assembly in the direction of the arrow,  
disconnect the connector CN501 on the mechanism con-  
trol board from the connector CN702 on the main board.  
(See Figs.5 and 6.)  
C
C
(4) Take out the top chassis assembly from the bottom chassis  
assembly.  
Top chassis assembly  
Fig.3  
Top chassis assembly  
D
Bottom chassis assembly  
Fig.4  
Mechanism control board  
Top chassis assembly  
CN501  
D
CN702  
Main board  
Bottom chassis assembly  
Fig.5  
Top chassis assembly  
D
D
Bottom chassis assembly  
Fig.6  
Rear bracket  
1-8 (No.MA063)  
3.1.4 Removing the front chassis  
(See Figs.7 and 8)  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the front  
panel assembly, heat sink and top chassis assembly.  
(1) From the both sides of the top chassis assembly, remove  
the two screws E attaching the front chassis.  
Top chassis assembly  
E
Front chassis  
Fig.7  
Top chassis assembly  
E
Front chassis  
Fig.8  
3.1.5 Removing the mechanism control board  
(See Fig.9)  
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front  
panel assembly, heat sink and top chassis assembly.  
(1) Disconnect the card wire from the connector CN601 on the  
mechanism control board.  
Mechanism control board  
CN601  
F
(2) Remove the five screws F attaching the mechanism control  
board.  
(3) Release the joints a and b, remove the mechanism control  
board.  
F
a
b
F
Fig.9  
(No.MA063)1-9  
3.1.6 Removing the CD mechanism assembly  
(See Fig.10)  
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front  
panel assembly, heat sink and top chassis assembly.  
Top chassis  
G
Reference:  
Remove the mechanism control board as required.  
(1) From the inside of the top chassis assembly, remove the  
three screws G attaching the CD mechanism assembly.  
(2) Take out the CD mechanism assembly from the top chas-  
sis.  
CD mechanism assembly  
G
G
Fig.10  
3.1.7 Removing the main board  
(See Figs.11 and 12)  
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front  
panel assembly, heat sink and top chassis assembly.  
(1) From the rear side of the bottom chassis assembly, remove  
the two screws H attaching the rear bracket to the bottom  
chassis assembly. (See Fig.11.)  
Rear bracket  
(2) From the top side of the bottom chassis assembly, remove  
the two screws J attaching the main board to the bottom  
chassis assembly. (See Fig.12.)  
(3) Release the stopper of the connector CN701 on the main  
board in an upward direction, disconnect the card wire from  
the connector CN701. (See Fig.12.)  
(4) Disconnect the wire from the connector of the gear bracket  
unit. (See Fig.12.)  
Bottom chassis assembly  
Fig.11  
H
Gear bracket unit  
Connector  
Bottom chassis assembly  
Card wire  
(5) Disconnect the wire from the connector CN951 on the main  
board. (See Fig.12.)  
Wire holders  
Reference:  
CN701  
Stopper  
After connecting the wires, fix the wires with the wire  
holders.  
(6) Take out the main board from the bottom chassis assem-  
bly.  
J
J
CN951  
Fig.12  
Main board  
Wires  
1-10 (No.MA063)  
3.1.8 Removing the rear bracket  
(See Fig.13)  
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front  
panel assembly, heat sink, top chassis assembly and main  
board.  
(1) From the rear side of the main board, remove the wires  
from the rear bracket in the direction of the arrow.  
(2) Remove the two screws K and screw L attaching the rear  
bracket to the main board.  
Wire  
Wire  
Main board  
Wire holder  
Rear bracket  
Slots  
Rear bracket  
K
L K  
Fig.13  
3.1.9 Removing the gear bracket unit  
(See Fig.14.)  
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front  
panel assembly, heat sink, top chassis assembly and main  
board.  
Gear bracket unit  
Bottom chassis  
(1) From the top side of the bottom chassis assembly, remove  
the screw M attaching the FPC guide to the bottom chas-  
sis.  
(2) Remove the five screws N attaching the gear bracket unit  
to the bottom chassis.  
Reference:  
When attaching the screws M and N, apply a locking  
agent them.  
(3) Take out the gear bracket unit from the bottom chassis.  
N
N
FPC guide  
M
Fig.14  
(No.MA063)1-11  
3.1.10 Removing the front board  
(See Figs.15 to 18)  
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front  
panel assembly.  
(1) From the rear side of the front panel assembly, remove the  
four screws P attaching the rear cover assembly to the front  
panel assembly. (See Fig.15.)  
P
P
Rear cover assembly  
(2) Release the twelve joints c of the front panel assembly and  
remove the rear cover assembly. (See Fig.16.)  
(3) From the left side of the front panel assembly, pull out the  
knob in the direction of the arrow 2 while pulling the front  
board in the direction of the arrow 1. (See Fig.17.)  
(4) Take out the front board from the front panel assembly.  
(See Fig.18.)  
P
Fig.15  
Note:  
Rear cover assembly  
When removing the rear cover assembly and front board, be  
careful not to lose the comp. spring. (See Fig.18.)  
joints c  
joints c  
joints c  
joints c  
Fig.16  
Front board  
Front panel assembly  
Knob  
1
2
Fig.17  
Front panel assembly  
Front board  
Comp. spring  
Fig.18  
1-12 (No.MA063)  
3.2 CD Mechanism section  
3.2.1 Removing the top cover  
(See Figs.1 and 2)  
(1) Remove the four screws A on the both side of the body.  
(2) Lift the front side of the top cover and move the top cover  
backward to release the two joints a.  
A
Top cover  
Joints a  
A
A
Fig.1  
Joints a  
Top cover  
Fig.2  
(No.MA063)1-13  
3.2.2 Removing the connector board  
(See Figs.3 to 5)  
Wires  
CAUTION:  
Before disconnecting the flexible wire from the pickup, solder  
the short-circuit point on the pickup. No observance of this in-  
struction may cause damage of the pickup.  
(1) Remove the screw B fixing the connector board.  
(2) Solder the short-circuit point on the pickup.  
(3) Disconnect the flexible wire from the pickup.  
(4) Move the connector board in the direction of the arrow to  
release the two joints b.  
B
Connector board  
(5) Unsolder the wires on the connector board if necessary.  
CAUTION:  
Unsolder the short-circuit point after reassembling.  
Joints b  
Fig.3  
Pickup  
Short-circuit point  
Short-circuit point  
(Soldering)  
Flexible wire  
Pickup  
Fig.4  
B
Connector board  
Flexible wire  
Frame  
Fig.5  
1-14 (No.MA063)  
3.2.3 Removing the DET switch  
(See Figs.6 and 7)  
(1) Extend the two tabs c of the feed sw. holder and pull out  
the switch.  
(2) Unsolder the DET switch wire if necessary.  
DET  
switch  
Connector  
board  
Pickup  
Tab c  
Fig.6  
DET switch  
DET switch wire  
Tab c  
Fig.7  
Feed sw. holder  
(No.MA063)1-15  
3.2.4 Removing the chassis unit  
(See Figs.8 and 9)  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
cover and connector board.  
(1) Remove the two suspension springs (L) and (R) attaching  
the chassis unit to the frame.  
Chassis unit  
Suspension spring (R)  
Suspension spring (L)  
Frame  
CAUTION:  
• The shape of the suspension spring (L) and (R) are dif-  
ferent. Handle them with care.  
• When reassembling, make sure that the three shafts  
on the underside of the chassis unit are inserted to the  
dampers certainly.  
Suspension spring (R)  
Chassis unit  
Suspension spring (L)  
Fig.8  
Shaft  
Shafts  
Damper  
Damper  
Frame  
Damper  
Fig.9  
1-16 (No.MA063)  
3.2.5 Removing the clamper assembly  
(See Figs.10 and 11)  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
cover.  
(1) Remove the clamper arm spring.  
(2) Move the clamper assembly in the direction of the arrow to  
release the two joints d.  
Clamper arm  
spring  
Chassis rivet  
assembly  
Joint d  
Clamper assembly  
Joint d  
Fig.10  
Clamper arm spring  
Clamper assembly  
Joint d  
Joint d  
Chassis rivet assembly  
Fig.11  
(No.MA063)1-17  
3.2.6 Removing the loading / feed motor assembly  
(See Figs.12 and 13)  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
cover, connector board and chassis unit.  
(1) Remove the screw C and move the loading / feed motor as-  
sembly in the direction of the arrow to remove it from the  
chassis rivet assembly.  
(2) Disconnect the wire from the loading / feed motor assembly  
if necessary.  
CAUTION:  
When reassembling, connect the wire from the loading /  
feed motor assembly to the flame as shown in Fig.12.  
Loading / feed motor assembly  
Fig.12  
Loading / feed motor assembly  
C
Fig.13  
1-18 (No.MA063)  
3.2.7 Removing the pickup unit  
Pickup unit  
(See Figs.14 to 18)  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
cover, connector board and chassis unit.  
(1) Remove the screw D and pull out the pu. shaft holder from  
the pu. shaft.  
Part e  
(2) Remove the screw E attaching the feed sw. holder.  
(3) Move the part e of the pickup unit upward with the pu. shaft  
and the feed sw. holder, then release the joint f of the feed  
sw. holder in the direction of the arrow. The joint g of the  
pickup unit and the feed rack is released, and the feed sw.  
holder comes off.  
(4) Remove the pu. shaft from the pickup unit.  
(5) Remove the screw F attaching the feed rack to the pickup  
unit.  
Feed rack  
Feed sw. holder  
Fig.15  
Pu. shaft  
3.2.8 Reattaching the pickup unit  
(See Figs.14 to 17)  
Pickup unit  
Part i  
(1) Reattach the feed rack to the pickup unit using the screw F.  
(2) Reattach the feed sw. holder to the feed rack while setting  
the joint g to the slot of the feed rack and setting the joint f  
of the feed rack to the switch of the feed sw. holder correct-  
ly.  
(3) As the feed sw. holder is temporarily attached to the pickup  
unit, set to the gear of the joint g and to the bending part of  
the chassis (joint h) at a time.  
D
E
Joint f  
Slot j  
Joint h  
Pu. shaft holder  
Joint g  
CAUTION:  
Make sure that the part i on the underside of the feed  
rack is certainly inserted to the slot j of the change lock  
lever.  
Feed sw. holder  
Fig.16  
Feed rack  
(4) Reattach the feed sw. holder using the screw E.  
(5) Reattach the pu. shaft to the pickup unit. Reattach the pu.  
shaft holder to the pu. shaft using the screw D.  
F
Feed sw. holder  
Pickup unit  
Joint f  
E
Fig.17  
Pu. shaft  
Pickup unit  
Joint g  
Joint g  
D
Part e  
Pickup unit  
Pu. shaft holder  
Fig.14  
Joint f  
Feed rack  
Feed sw. holder  
Fig.18  
(No.MA063)1-19  
3.2.9 Removing the trigger arm  
Joint k  
(See Figs.19 and 20)  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
cover, connector board and clamper unit.  
(1) Turn the trigger arm in the direction of the arrow to release  
the joint k and pull out upward.  
Trigger arm  
CAUTION:  
When reassembling, insert the part m and n of the trigger  
arm into the part p and q at the slot of the chassis rivet  
assembly respectively and join the joint k at a time.  
Chassis rivet assembly  
Fig.19  
Part p  
Trigger arm  
Part q  
Part m  
Part n  
Chassis  
rivet  
assembly  
Fig.20  
3.2.10 Removing the top plate assembly  
(See Fig.21)  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
cover, connector board, chassis unit, and clamper assembly.  
(1) Remove the screw H.  
Top plate assembly  
(2) Move the top plate assembly in the direction of the arrow to  
release the two joints r.  
(3) Unsolder the wire marked s if necessary.  
H
Joints r  
s
Fig.21  
1-20 (No.MA063)  
3.2.11 Removing the mode sw. / select lock arm  
(See Figs.22 and 23)  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
plate assembly.  
Link plate  
Joint t  
Mode sw.  
Select lock arm  
(1) Bring up the mode sw. to release from the link plate (joint t)  
and turn in the direction of the arrow to release the joint u.  
(2) Unsolder the wire of the mode sw. marked s if necessary.  
(3) Turn the select lock arm in the direction of the arrow to re-  
lease the two joints v.  
(4) The select lock arm spring comes off the select lock arm at  
the same time.  
Joint u  
s
Fig.22  
Top plate  
Hook w  
Select lock arm  
Select lock arm  
Top plate  
Select lock  
arm spring  
Joints v  
Link plate  
Fig.23  
(No.MA063)1-21  
3.2.12 Reassembling the mode sw. / select lock arm  
(See Figs.24 to 26)  
Select lock arm spring  
Hook w  
REFERENCE:  
Reverse the above removing procedure.  
Joint v  
(1) Reattach the select lock arm spring to the top plate and set  
the shorter end of the select lock arm spring to the hook w  
on the top plate.  
Joint v  
(2) Set the other longer end of the select lock arm spring to the  
boss x on the underside of the select lock arm, and join the  
select lock arm to the slots (joint v). Turn the select lock  
arm as shown in the figure.  
(3) Reattach the mode sw. while setting the part t to the first  
peak of the link plate gear, and join the joint u.  
Select lock arm  
Boss x  
CAUTION:  
Fig.24  
When reattaching the mode sw., check if the points y and  
z are correctly fitted and if each part operates properly.  
Joint t  
Point y  
Link plate  
Point z  
Fig.25  
Mode sw.  
Select  
lock arm  
Joint t  
Link plate  
Joint u  
Fig.26  
1-22 (No.MA063)  
3.2.13 Removing the select arm R / link plate  
(See Figs.27 and 28)  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
plate assembly.  
(1) Bring up the select arm R to release from the link plate  
(joint a') and turn as shown in the figure to release the two  
joints b' and joint c'.  
Link plate  
Joint b'  
Joint c'  
Joint r  
Select arm R  
Joint b'  
(2) Move the link plate in the direction of the arrow to release  
the joint d'. Remove the link plate spring at the same time.  
REFERENCE:  
Before removing the link plate, remove the mode sw..  
Joint a'  
Fig.27  
Link plate spring  
Top plate  
Joint d'  
Link plate  
Fig.28  
3.2.14 Reattaching the Select arm R / link plate  
(See Figs.29 and 30)  
REFERENCE:  
Reverse the above removing procedure.  
(1) Reattach the link plate spring.  
(2) Reattach the link plate to the link plate spring while joining  
them at joint d'.  
Link plate spring  
Joint d'  
Joint c'  
Select arm R  
(3) Reattach the joint a' of the select arm R to the first peak of  
the link plate while joining the two joints b' with the slots.  
Then turn the select arm R as shown in the figure. The top  
plate is joined to the joint c'.  
CAUTION:  
When reattaching the select arm R, check if the points e'  
and f' are correctly fitted and if each part operates prop-  
erly.  
Joint b'  
Joint a'  
Joint b'  
Joint a'  
Fig.29  
Link plate  
Point f'  
Point e'  
Fig.30  
(No.MA063)1-23  
3.2.15 Removing the loading roller assembly  
(See Figs.31 to 33)  
Loading roller assembly  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the  
clamper assembly and top plate assembly.  
(1) Push inward the loading roller assembly on the gear side  
and detach it upward from the slot of the joint g' of the lock  
arm rivet assembly.  
Roller guide  
spring  
(2) Detach the loading roller assembly from the slot of the joint  
h' of the lock arm rivet assembly.  
Loading roller assembly  
Part k'  
The roller guide comes off the gear section of the loading  
roller assembly.  
Roller guide  
spring  
Remove the roller guide and the HL washer from the shaft  
of the loading roller assembly.  
(3) Remove the screw J attaching the lock arm rivet assembly.  
(4) Push the shaft at the joint i' of the lock arm rivet assembly  
inward to release the lock arm rivet assembly from the slot  
of the L side plate.  
(5) Extend the lock arm rivet assembly outward and release  
the joint j' from the boss of the chassis rivet assembly. The  
roller guide springs on both sides come off at the same  
time.  
Fig.32  
Chassis rivet assembly  
CAUTION:  
When reassembling, reattach the left and right roller  
guide springs to the lock arm rivet assembly before reat-  
taching the lock arm rivet assembly to the chassis rivet  
assembly. Make sure to fit the part k' of the roller guide  
spring inside of the roller guide. (Refer to Fig.34.)  
Boss  
Roller guide  
HL washer  
Loading roller assembly  
L side plate  
J
Roller guide spring  
Roller guide  
Joint h'  
Lock arm rivet assembly  
Joint i'  
Joint j'  
Roller guide spring  
Roller guide spring  
Fig.33  
Roller guide  
HL washer  
Roller shaft assembly  
Joint g'  
Loading roller assembly  
Roller guide spring  
Lock arm rivet assembly  
Fig.31  
Loading roller  
Roller guide spring  
Lock arm rivet assembly  
Fig.34  
1-24 (No.MA063)  
3.2.16 Removing the loading gear 5, 6 and 7  
(See Figs.35 and 36)  
Loading gear bracket  
Loading gear 6  
K
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
cover, chassis unit, pickup unit and top plate assembly.  
(1) Remove the screw K attaching the loading gear bracket.  
The loading gear 6 and 7 come off the loading gear brack-  
et.  
(2) Pull out the loading gear 5.  
Loading gear 5  
Loading gear 3  
Fig.35  
K
Loading gear bracket  
Loading gear 6  
Loading gear 5  
Loading gear 7  
Fig.36  
(No.MA063)1-25  
3.2.17 Removing the gears  
Joint p'  
(See Figs.37 to 40)  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
cover, chassis unit, top plate assembly and pickup unit.  
• Pull out the loading gear 3. (See Fig.35.)  
(1) Pull out the feed gear.  
Change plate  
rivet assembly  
Shafts  
Loading gear 4  
(2) Move the loading plate assembly in the direction of the ar-  
row to release the L side plate from the two slots m' of the  
chassis rivet assembly. (See Fig.37.)  
(3) Detach the loading plate assembly upward from the chas-  
sis rivet assembly while releasing the joint n'. Remove the  
slide hook and loading plate spring from the loading plate  
assembly.  
Loading gear plate  
rivet assembly  
Shaft  
Loading gear 2  
(4) Pull out the loading gear 2 and remove the change lock le-  
ver.  
(5) Remove the E ring and washer attaching the change gear  
2.  
(6) The change gear 2, change gear spring and adjusting  
washer come off.  
(7) Remove the loading gear 1.  
Loading gear 1  
Chassis rivet assembly  
E ring  
Change gear 2  
Fig.38  
(8) Move the change plate rivet assembly in the direction of the  
arrow to release from the three shafts of the chassis rivet  
assembly upward. (See Fig.38.)  
Joint n'  
Loading plate assembly  
Slide hook  
(9) Detach the loading gear plate rivet assembly from the shaft  
of the chassis rivet assembly upward while releasing the  
joint p'. (See Figs.38 and 40.)  
Loading plate spring  
(10) Pull out the loading gear 4.  
L side plate  
Slot m'  
Slot m'  
L side plate  
Loading plate assembly  
Joint n'  
Slot m'  
Chassis rivet assembly  
Fig.39  
Slot m'  
Feed gear  
E ring  
Washer  
Loading gear 1  
Chassis rivet assembly  
Change gear 2  
Loading gear 2  
Fig.37  
Change gear  
spring  
Change lock lever  
Loading gear 4  
Adjusting  
washer  
Change plate  
rivet assembly  
Chassis rivet assembly  
Loading gear plate rivet  
assembly  
Fig.40  
1-26 (No.MA063)  
3.2.18 Removing the turn table / spindle motor  
(See Figs.41 and 42)  
Turn table  
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top  
cover, connector board, chassis unit and clamper assembly.  
(1) Remove the two screws L attaching the spindle motor as-  
sembly through the slot of the turn table on top of the body.  
(2) Unsolder the wire on the connector board if necessary.  
L
Fig.41  
L
Turn table  
Spindle motor  
Fig.42  
(No.MA063)1-27  
SECTION 4  
ADJUSTMENT  
4.1 Adjustment method  
„ Test instruments required for adjustment  
(1) Digital oscilloscope (100MHz)  
(2) Electric voltmeter  
„ Standard measuring conditions  
Power supply voltage  
Load impedance  
Output Level  
DC14.4V(10.5 to 16V)  
20KΩ(2 Speakers connection)  
Line out 2.0V (Vol. MAX)  
(3) Digital tester  
(4) Tracking offset meter  
(5) Test Disc JVC :CTS-1000  
(6) Extension cable for check  
EXTSH002-22P × 1  
„ Dummy load  
Exclusive dummy load should be used for AM,and FM. For FM  
dummy load,there is a loss of 6dB between SSG output and  
antenna input.The loss of 6dB need not be considered since  
direct reading of figures are applied in this working standard.  
„ Standard volume position  
Balance and Bass &Treble volume : lndication"0"  
Loudness : OFF  
„ How to connect the extension cable for adjusting  
Caution:  
Be sure to attach the heat sink and rear bracket onto the power amplifier IC and regulator IC respectively, before supply the power.  
If voltage is applied without attaching these parts, the power amplifier IC and regulator IC will be destroyed by heat.  
Extension cable: EXTSH002-22P  
Heat sink  
Rear bracket  
CN501  
1-28 (No.MA063)  
 
SECTION 5  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
5.1 Feed section  
NO  
NO  
YES  
NO  
Is 5v or 0V at IC621  
pin 40?  
Is the wiring for IC621  
pin 40 correct?  
Is 5V present at IC681  
pin 6?  
Check CD8V.  
YES  
Check the vicinity of  
IC621.  
YES  
NO  
YES  
Is 4V present at both  
sides of the feed motor?  
Is 6V or 2V present at  
IC681 pins 17 and 18?  
Check the feed motor  
connection wiring.  
YES  
NO  
Check the feed motor.  
Check IC681.  
5.2 Focus section  
When the lens is  
moving:  
Check the circuits in  
the vicinity of IC681  
pins 1 and 2.  
NO  
4V  
Does the S-search  
waveform appear at  
IC681 pins 13 and 14?  
YES  
Check the pickup and  
its connections.  
YES  
5.3 Spindle section  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is 4V present between  
IC681 pins 15 and 16?  
Is 4V present at IC621  
pin 41?  
Is the disk rotated?  
YES  
Check IC621.  
YES  
YES  
Does the RF signal  
appear at IC601 pin 19?  
Check the spindle motor  
and its wiring.  
Check the vicinity of  
IC681.  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Check the circuits in  
the vicinity of IC601  
or the pickup.  
Is the RF waveform  
at IC601 pin 19 distorted?  
YES  
Proceed to the Tracking  
section  
5.4 Tracking section  
Check the circuits in  
the vicinity of IC601  
pins 2 to 12.  
When the disc is rotated  
at first:  
NO  
NO  
Check the pickup and  
its connections.  
Approx. 1.2V  
Is the tracking error  
signal output at IC601  
pin 11?  
YES  
Check IC621.  
(No.MA063)1-29  
 
5.5 Signal processing section  
Compare the L-ch and  
R-ch to locate the  
defective point.  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is the sound output from  
both channels (L, R)?  
No sound from either  
channel.  
YES  
YES  
Normal  
NO  
Is 9V present at IC161  
pin 26?  
Is 9V present at IC901  
pin 13?  
Check IC901 and its  
peripheral circuits.  
YES  
Check the connection  
between IC901 pin 13  
and IC161 pin 26.  
YES  
Is the audio signal  
(including sampling  
output components)  
output to IC572 pins 1  
and 7 during playback?  
NO  
Check IC572 and its  
peripheral circuits.  
YES  
Is the audio signal  
output at IC161 pins 18  
to 21 during playback?  
NO  
NO  
Check IC161 and its  
peripheral circuits.  
YES  
Is the audio signal output  
at IC361/IC381 pins 12  
and 13 during playback?  
Check IC361/IC381 and  
its peripheral circuits.  
YES  
Check the power amp.  
IC301.  
1-30 (No.MA063)  
5.6 Maintenance of laser pickup  
5.7 Replacement of laser pickup  
(1) Cleaning the pick up lens  
Before you replace the pick up, please try to clean the lens  
with a alcohol soaked cotton swab.  
(2) Life of the laser diode  
Turn of the power switch and, disconnect the  
power cord.  
When the life of the laser diode has expired, the following  
symptoms will appear.  
• The level of RF output (EFM output: amplitude of eye  
pattern) will be low.  
Replace the pickup with a normal one. (Refer  
to "Removing the pickup unit" on the previous page.)  
NO  
Is RF output  
1.3 0.4Vp-p?  
Replace it.  
Plug the power cord in, and turn the power on.  
At this time, check that the laser emits for about  
seconds and the objective lens moves up and down.  
Note: Do not observe the laser beam directly.  
YES  
OK  
(3) Semi-fixed resistor on the APC PC board  
Play a disc.  
The semi-fixed resistor on the APC printed circuit board  
which is attached to the pickup is used to adjust the laser  
power.Since this adjustment should be performed to match  
the characteristics of the whole optical block, do not touch  
the semi-fixed resistor.  
If the laser power is lower than the specified value, the la-  
ser diode is almost worn out, and the laser pickup should  
be replaced. If the semi-fixed resistor is adjusted while the  
pickup is functioning normally, the laser pickup may be  
damaged due to excessive current.  
Check the eye-pattern at  
RF test point.  
Finish.  
(No.MA063)1-31  
5.8 16 PIN CORD DIAGRAM  
BK Black  
Red  
Blue  
WH White  
Brown  
GN  
VI  
Green  
Violet  
1
3
5
7
10  
VI/BK  
GY/BK  
WH/BK  
GN/BK  
VI  
BR  
YL  
NC  
NC  
9
2
4
RD  
BL  
GY  
WH  
GN  
12  
14  
16  
11  
GY Gray  
Yellow  
Orange  
6
8
BL/WH 13  
OR/WH  
BK  
YL  
OR  
BR  
15  
RD  
VI  
1
2
3
RR+  
RR-  
VI/BK  
GY  
FR+  
FR-  
FL+  
4
5
GY/BK  
WH  
WH/BK  
6
7
8
FL-  
RL+  
RL-  
GN  
GN/BK  
10  
12  
TEL  
BR  
YL  
MEMORY  
MEMORY BACKUP  
DIRECT TO BATTERY  
+12Volt  
REMOTE  
ILL  
BL/WH  
13  
14  
OR/WH  
RD  
15  
16  
ACC  
GND  
ACC + 12Volt  
GROUND  
BK  
Rear Right  
ANT Auto Antenna  
ACC ACC Line  
RR  
FR  
FL  
RL  
Front Right  
Front Left  
Rear Left  
Telephone Muting  
TEL  
GND  
MEMORY  
Ground  
Memory Backup Battery+  
Remote out  
REMOTE  
Illuminations Control  
ILL  
1-32 (No.MA063)  
(No.MA063)1-33  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
AV & MULTIMEDIA COMPANY CAR ELECTRONICS CATEGORY 10-1,1chome,Ohwatari-machi,Maebashi-city,371-8543,Japan  
(No.MA063)  
Printed in Japan  
WPC  
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS  
CD RECEIVER  
KD-LH401  
CD-ROM No.SML200404  
Area suffix  
E ----------- Continental Europe  
EX --------------- Central Europe  
Contents  
Block diagram  
2-1  
Standard schematic diagrams  
Printed circuit boards  
2-2  
2-5, 6  
No.MA063SCH  
2004/4  
COPYRIGHT 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.  
Safety precaution  
Burrs formed during molding may be left over on some parts of the chassis. Therefore,  
pay attention to such burrs in the case of preforming repair of this system.  
!
Please use enough caution not to see the beam directly or touch it in case of an  
adjustment or operation check.  
!
Block diagram  
J321  
FRONT  
LINE OUT  
FL  
FR  
J1  
ANT  
IC573  
X571  
CLOCK GEN.  
SCK  
TU.L  
TU.R  
TU1  
FM/AM  
TUNER  
IC361  
IC381  
LINE AMP  
RL  
RR  
VA,VB  
VE,VF  
MD,LD  
VREF  
VOUTL  
VOUTR  
CD.L-CH  
CD.R-CH  
REAR  
LINE OUT  
SW1  
SW2  
IC572  
CD LPF  
DET OUT  
SW1  
IC571  
24bit DAC  
RWSEL,IOP  
IC601  
CD RF  
FL+, FL-  
OUT FL  
OUT RL  
OUT FR  
OUT RR  
SW2  
CD.L  
CD.R  
FR+, FR-  
RL+, RL-  
RR+, RR-  
IC301  
POWER  
AMP  
ACOUTL  
ACOUTR  
RFGC  
RF,FE,TE  
RFRP  
SEL,TEB  
RFDC  
DACML  
DACMC  
DACMD  
SDO  
REST  
REST  
IC161  
E.VOLUME  
SWITCH  
SPK  
BATTERY  
FM/AM  
PLLDI  
IC201  
EQ  
ACINL  
ACINR  
BCK  
LRCK  
IC71  
RDS  
LOAD/FEED+  
LOAD/FEED-  
PLLCK  
PLLDA  
PLLCE  
SM,SQ  
SD/ST  
SEEK  
IC901  
REGULATOR  
DATA  
BCK  
LRCK  
REST,SW1,SW2  
LOAD/FEED  
EACH  
BLOCK  
MOTOR  
CH.L  
CH.R  
IC652  
MP3 DEC  
BUS0 to BUS3  
BUCK,CCE  
DSPPST  
EQCLK  
EQDATA  
EQLA  
SPINDLE+  
RDSDA  
RDSSCK  
LIN.L  
LIN.R  
SWL  
SWR  
IC621  
D.SERVO  
& DSP  
SPINDLE-  
IC251  
SUB OUT  
AMP  
SPINDLE  
MOTOR  
SUB  
WOOFER  
OUT  
VREF  
AFCK  
CF,MRC  
CD RESET  
PON,PS2  
CDMUTE,CDREQ  
MP3DA  
MP3CK  
IC502  
EPROM  
LOAD/FEED+  
LOAD/FEED-  
SPINDLE+  
SPINDLE-  
TRACKING+  
TRACKING-  
FOCUS+  
VOLDA  
VOLCK  
PICK UP  
LPF1  
LPF2  
FMO  
DMO  
TRO  
FOO  
FOCUS+  
IC271  
SWITCH  
VOLMUTE  
FOCUS-  
IC701  
CONTROLLER  
MP3DA  
MP3CK  
MP3STB  
MP3RST  
TRACKING+  
TRACKING-  
VA,VB,VE,VF  
MD,LD  
STEERINGREM.  
STEERING  
REMOTE  
CDRESET  
B.DET,P.DET  
CDMUTE,CDREQ  
CDON  
LD/FE  
FOCUS-  
VREF  
IC681  
CD DRIVER  
IC501  
CPU  
E2PROMDI  
E2PROM DO  
E2PROM CK  
BUSSO,BUSSI  
BUSIO,/BUSIO  
BUSSCK  
BUSSI/SO  
BUSCLK  
LINE IN  
IC703  
EPROM  
IC503  
J-BUS BUFF  
SBRST  
IC702  
RESET  
BUSSO  
BUSI/O  
BUSCLK  
BUSINT  
CD  
CHANGER  
SI/SO  
SCK  
IC802  
FLASH  
ROM  
IC801  
J-BUS  
BUFF  
JS801  
ENCODER  
IC805  
REMOCON  
R3  
G3  
B3  
SI/SO  
A0 to A19  
D0 to D7  
RE,WE  
EXROM,CS1  
ROMCNT  
D451,D453  
BACK  
LIGHT  
REMOCON  
DISPCK,DISPDA  
DISPCE  
Q408 to Q413  
Q420 to Q425  
DRIVER  
VOL1,VOL2  
REM  
EFD-OUT1  
EFD-OUT2  
OUT1  
OUT2  
IC951  
MOTOR  
DRIVER  
SBRST  
CL1  
CL2  
CL3  
DOOR  
MOTOR  
DB0 to DB7  
IC801  
LCD  
DRIVER  
RST  
OSC,RES,CS  
RS,WR,RD  
IC803  
RESET  
LCD  
MODULE  
EFD-IN1  
EFD-IN2  
EFD-IN3  
SBRST  
LED0 to LED6  
TRIMLED  
KEY0 to KEY2  
KEYIN  
KEYDA  
SWITCH  
DISPCE,DISPDA  
DISPCK  
D401 to D422  
INDICATOR  
LED  
S600 to S617  
KEY  
MATRIX  
2-1  
Standard schematic diagrams  
Main amplifier section  
CN141  
QGA2006C1-04  
J321  
QNN0490-001  
FL  
RL  
R331  
R351  
820  
820  
R332  
R352  
180  
180  
TU1  
QAU0203-002  
IC201  
FR  
RR  
R321  
R341  
820  
820  
M62449FP-X  
Q331  
Q351  
KTD1304-X  
KTD1304-X  
R141  
47K  
R151  
47K  
Q341  
KTD1304-X  
Q321  
KTD1304-X  
C214  
0.047  
IC271  
Q271  
C141  
0.0047  
C151  
0.0047  
UN2211-X  
C212  
C211  
2.2/50  
C232  
2.2/50  
0.0027  
LPF2  
CD4066BPW-X  
R322  
R342  
180  
180  
C231  
0.0027  
J1  
R258  
5.6K  
R259  
15K  
C257  
C210  
C209  
0.0018  
0.0068  
C230  
C229  
0.0018  
0.0068  
QAM0556-001  
L1  
0.033  
0.027  
0.027  
C273  
C274  
4.7u  
C256  
0.082  
2.2/50  
C81 4.7/25  
C91 4.7/25  
R81  
R91  
10K  
10K  
C208  
C207  
0.0047  
0.015  
C228  
C227  
0.0047  
0.015  
IC161  
TDA7404D-X  
C272  
C275  
0.012  
0.039  
C206  
C205  
0.012  
0.039  
C226  
C225  
0.0056  
TU.L  
TU.R  
1K  
1K  
0
C161  
1/50  
C181  
1/50  
Q272  
UN2211-X  
R162  
CD.L  
0.027  
0.1  
C204  
C203  
0.027  
0.1  
C224  
C223  
CN251  
QGA2501C1-03  
C162  
1/50  
R182  
CD.R  
C182  
1/50  
R261  
820  
R262  
180  
LPF1  
R2  
R163  
CH.L  
C271  
0.01  
C163  
1/50  
R254  
0
Q5  
27  
2SB624/4/-X  
R5  
R6  
22  
22  
R183  
CH.R  
0
C222  
0.082  
C202  
C201  
0.082  
C183  
D253  
R1  
47K  
2.2/50  
C221  
0.0082  
C251  
1/50  
R263  
4.7K  
MA111-X  
C259  
2.2/50  
C184  
4.7/25  
C215  
C216  
C213  
0.047  
10/16  
47/6.3  
LIN.R  
C276  
0.01  
Q6  
2SB624/4/-X  
1/50  
C165  
SUBM  
D251  
LIN.G  
LIN.L  
MA111-X  
D252  
10K  
10K  
C166  
10/16  
Q252  
UN2111-X  
R166  
R186  
1/50  
C164  
C260  
0.1  
MA111-X  
1/50  
CN981  
QGA2006F1-02  
R71  
1K  
Q55  
UN2111-X  
Q57  
UN2111-X  
D981  
R59  
4.7K  
RDSDA  
Q7  
UN2211-X  
R363  
33K  
R361  
22K  
IC301  
LA47515  
MA111-X  
FM/AM  
R308  
1K  
R305  
IC361  
0
Q54  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
R981  
0
C365  
C363  
0.1  
NJM2160AV-X  
C309  
1/50  
0.0015  
C367  
100/10  
R187  
1K  
R12  
39K  
RR-  
D5  
C361  
C369  
1/50  
SM  
4.7/25  
MA111-X  
RR+  
GND  
C311  
0.47  
R197  
100K  
R311  
Q56  
UN2111-X  
C319  
0.022  
C371  
47/16  
27K  
FR-  
R301  
27K  
R188  
1K  
C370  
1/50  
C301  
0.47  
D241  
MA111-X  
C243  
0.047  
R245  
12K  
R51  
470  
C368  
C362  
FR+  
Q51  
4.7/25  
SQ  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
C317  
100/16  
R58  
47K  
100/10  
R198  
100K  
Q241  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
C52  
0.1  
C366  
0.0015  
C364  
0.1  
C242  
1/50  
R362  
22K  
R364  
33K  
C54  
0.01  
RDSSCK  
Q53  
UN2211-X  
Q301  
UN2211-X  
C318  
22/16  
R383  
33K  
FL+  
FL-  
D301  
R381  
22K  
C383  
0.1  
IC381  
R177  
100K  
NJM2160AV-X  
C385  
0.0015  
MA111-X  
C372  
C320  
0.022  
100/10  
RL+  
RL-  
C387  
100/10  
R167  
1K  
9V  
C381  
C389  
1/50  
4.7/25  
C302  
0.47  
R178  
100K  
R302  
27K  
C391  
47/16  
C310  
1/50  
R306  
C312  
0.47  
R168  
1K  
C390  
1/50  
R312  
27K  
CN702  
C388  
C382  
0
QGB2027M4-22S  
4.7/25  
CD.L  
CD.R  
100/10  
C386  
0.0015  
C384  
0.1  
C961  
C994  
R382  
22K  
R384  
33K  
C993  
100P  
C991  
100P  
C997  
100P  
C995  
100P  
3300/16  
D961  
100P  
C992  
100P  
C998  
AMPSW  
1N5404-TU-15  
100P  
C996  
100P  
Q707  
UN2211-X  
C962  
0.1  
R790  
R789  
R788  
47K  
47K  
47K  
ILL  
D993  
RB160M-30-X  
D991  
RB160M-30-X  
D997  
RB160M-30-X  
D995  
D994  
RB160M-30-X  
D992  
RB160M-30-X  
D998  
RB160M-30-X  
D996  
CDREQ  
R800  
47K  
To CN501  
(SHEET 2)  
Q881  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
R882  
4.7K  
Q706  
UN2211-X  
IC951  
RB160M-30-X  
RB160M-30-X  
BA6956AN  
D853  
RB160M-30-X  
EFD-OUT1  
0
0
TEL  
EFD-OUT2  
KICK  
R728  
R730  
SI/SO  
C952  
0.01  
SCK  
R978  
2.2K  
R983  
2.2K  
R747  
R745  
0
D951  
UDZS3.9B-X  
KICK  
47K  
R773  
VOLMUTE R771  
R772  
330  
1K  
1K  
DETACH  
TEL-M  
CD8V  
L703  
47u  
47K  
47K  
R742  
Q951  
UN2211-X  
R774  
R775  
Q895  
UN2211-X  
R741  
10K  
270  
C705  
0.047  
R740  
D854  
RB160M-30-X  
CN901  
MUTE  
VOLDA  
VOLCK  
10K  
3.9K  
3.9K  
3.9K  
1K  
270  
R739  
R737  
R735  
R733  
R732  
C709  
0.1  
QNZ0650-001  
PON  
PS  
BUZZER  
DISPCE  
DISPCK  
DISPDA  
BUSI/O  
BUSCLK  
BUSSO  
SI/SO  
R776  
1K  
IC901  
R778  
R779  
R777  
1K  
TD  
RD  
47K  
47K  
AN80T07A  
CN951  
SUBM  
LPF1  
LPF2  
1K  
1K  
1K  
R780  
R791  
R792  
QGA2501F1-02  
1K  
R731  
R729  
R793  
R794  
R795  
R796  
47K  
47K  
47K  
47K  
1K  
MUTE  
1K  
R727  
C703  
470P  
R785  
R726  
47K  
47K  
14V  
D851  
RB160M-30-X  
VPP  
D781  
MA111-X  
R797  
10K  
1K  
R725  
R723  
SM  
SQ  
1K  
1K  
R722  
R721  
MRC  
L701  
47u  
D901  
10K  
Q977  
2SB709A/QR/-X  
Q901  
2SB624/4/-X  
4.7K  
4.7K  
R720  
R719  
MA111-X  
R798  
1K  
C910  
0.47  
KEY  
AMPSW  
VDD  
R799  
47K  
47K  
R724  
L702  
47u  
Q701  
UN2211-X  
R906  
47K  
IC701  
Parts are safety assurance parts.  
When replacing those parts make  
sure to use the specified one.  
VSS  
Q902  
UN2211-X  
UPD784217AGC268  
QNZ0664-001  
REMOCON  
QAL0536-001  
GND  
L921  
4.7U  
R711  
47K  
GND  
REMOCON  
VDD5V  
SBRST  
15V  
SBRST  
VDD5V  
ACC5V  
15V  
VDD5V  
D922  
MA111-X  
R713  
47K  
CN952  
DIM  
QJB005-040909  
ACC5V  
LEVEL  
ACC5V  
R925  
180  
EFD-IN1  
EFD-IN2  
SBT  
R763  
100  
R806  
100K  
LEVEL  
PS2  
SBT  
To CN801  
(SHEET 3)  
RESET  
IC801  
HD74HC126FP-X  
EFD-IN3  
SBD  
LEVEL  
PS2  
R710  
2.2K  
SBD  
PS2  
X1  
DISPSCK  
10V  
10V  
R801  
22K  
R704  
10M  
DISPSCK  
DISPDATA  
DISPCE  
DETACH  
KEYDATA  
DISPCK  
DISPDA  
DISPCE  
DETACH  
R802  
R804  
100K  
DISPCE  
DISPDATA  
KEYDATA  
DETACH  
R803  
100  
47K  
R807  
330  
R841  
3.3K  
R808  
100  
J801  
QNZ0095-001  
D921  
RB160M-30-X  
BUZZER  
R926  
47K  
Q841  
UN2211-X  
VR921  
47K  
SHEET 1  
2-2  
CD servo control section  
R585  
30k  
0.1  
C585  
C587  
120p  
C589  
R613  
68p  
R581  
20k  
R583  
C611  
CD.L-CH  
1k  
R612  
12k  
4.7/35  
R589  
10k  
4.7/35  
C577  
R614  
15k  
R611 R610  
2k  
10k  
C610  
100  
5p  
R572  
2.2M  
C586  
C588  
120p  
C590  
R582  
20k  
R584  
Q573  
2SB624/4/-X  
L571  
47u  
CD.R-CH  
12k  
R586  
4.7/35  
4.7/35  
Q571  
30k  
UN2111-X  
R601  
82k  
82k  
VB  
VA  
VF  
VE  
MD  
R602  
R603  
R604  
Q572  
330k  
330k  
CDON  
UN2211-X  
C605  
R608  
820  
Q574  
UN2211-X  
C603 100/6.3  
C612  
C613  
0.01  
0.01  
0.0068  
2SB1132/QR/-W  
Q601  
C604  
R616  
10k  
IOP  
0.01  
LD  
IC652  
TC94A34FG-002  
VA  
VF  
C614  
0.01  
C637  
C636  
C632  
C631  
0.047  
0.047  
470p  
470p  
VE  
VREF  
VB  
R615  
150  
C667 0.01  
L622  
47u  
R634  
R633  
R632  
0
0
0
SEL  
MD  
LD  
TEB  
C666 100p  
C675  
RFGC  
R678  
FOCUS-  
FOCUS+  
TRACKING+  
TRACKING-  
SPINDLE+  
SPINDLE-  
REST  
C676  
R655  
C656  
10k  
0.1  
C665  
0.1  
R675  
220  
C664  
2200P  
SW2  
C630 0.033  
TE  
C668 47/6.3  
C669 0.01  
SW1  
RFDC  
FE  
C643  
0.01  
LOAD/FEED+  
LOAD/FEED-  
RFRP  
C629 0.033  
R629  
C628  
10k  
R651  
100k  
C627 0.01  
RF  
47/6.3  
Q652  
BUS0  
BUS1  
BUS2  
BUS3  
BUCK  
CCE  
C626  
0.0027  
UN2211-X  
Q651  
L651  
47u  
C625 0.01  
R628  
1.5M  
2SB624/4/-X  
DSPRST  
R626  
R625  
470k  
47k  
IC621  
TC94A14FA  
L623  
47u  
R624  
L501  
47u  
5.6k  
C507  
0.01  
Q501  
C512  
IC504  
NJU7241F33-X  
R516  
1k  
IC501  
TMP91CW12AF5GJ4  
100/6.3  
C513  
UN2111-X  
R540  
47k  
C508  
0.01  
0.01  
C511  
D506  
L502  
47u  
R523  
100 DSPRST  
47/16  
0.1  
MA111-X  
R522  
R521  
R520  
R519  
R518  
R517  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
CCE  
BUCK  
BUS0  
BUS1  
BUS2  
BUS3  
R539  
C689  
47/16  
47k  
B501  
0
IC681  
BA5830FP-X  
R561  
100k  
1k  
R541  
100  
R568  
BUSSO  
R563  
C687  
C688  
C685  
C686  
C693  
47/16  
SPINDLE+  
FOCUS+  
FOCUS-  
R562  
3.9k  
SPINDLE-  
R542  
R543  
R544  
R545  
10k  
6.8k  
LOAD/FEED+  
LOAD/FEED-  
TRACKING+  
TRACKING-  
MP3DA  
MP3CK  
100  
100  
10k  
CD.L-CH  
AGND  
C551 0.01  
C694  
Q502  
UN2211-X  
BUSSI  
CD.R-CH  
9V  
CDON  
SW1  
SCK  
R515  
R564  
R565  
R682  
R690  
R513  
1k  
47k  
R514  
B.DET  
CN502  
R566  
2.2k  
R681  
33k  
R689  
R549 4.7k  
R550 4.7k  
R548 8.2k  
R525  
QGF0501F1-08X  
47k  
DATE  
CDMUTE  
CDREQ  
6.8k  
12k  
R685  
R509  
47k  
47k  
To CN702  
(SHEET 1)  
RESET  
R569  
IOP  
R512  
R511  
R683  
6.8k  
R686  
TRO  
BUSIO  
6.8k  
R687  
100k  
1k CDRESET  
1k  
R570  
CDRESET  
B.DET  
BUSSCK  
BOOT  
12k  
R688  
/BUSIO  
BUSSCK  
6.8k  
FOO  
1k  
R553  
P.DET  
BUSSI  
1.8k  
NAX0385-001X  
X501  
BUSSI/SO  
BUSCLK  
BUSSO  
R510  
100  
R556  
18k  
VREF  
DMO  
0
CD8V  
C690  
10/6.3  
C682  
CDON  
CN501  
QGB2027L1-22X  
4.7/35  
Q681  
2SB1184/QR/-X  
C683  
IC502  
0.1  
C684  
BR24L01AFV-W-X  
47/16  
SHEET 2  
2-3  
LCD & Key control section  
D453 NSCM315C-W  
D451 NSCM315C-W  
R845  
R844  
R843  
R842  
R841  
47k  
47k  
R830  
R829  
C809  
C808  
C807  
47k  
560  
390  
270  
300  
1.5k  
1.5k  
1.5k  
47k  
KEY0  
4.7/6.3  
4.7/6.3  
4.7/6.3  
R604  
R603  
R602  
R601  
CN801  
NNZ0098-001X  
S602  
S605  
S604  
S603  
S601  
REM  
C806  
0.047  
1.5K  
820  
560  
390  
270  
300  
KEY1  
SBRST  
VDD5V  
ACC5V  
15V  
R616  
R609  
R608  
R607  
R606  
R605  
C804  
470p  
To CN701  
(SHEET 1)  
SBT  
QGF0523F1-40W  
R846  
DISPCE  
10k  
R891  
0R0  
R823 1K  
CN802  
C818 0.047  
S600  
S611  
S610  
S609  
S608  
S607  
S606  
KEY2  
ANA  
OSC  
RD  
R816 1K  
PS2  
R821 8.2k  
SBD  
DISPSCK  
PSAVE2  
KEYIN  
820  
560  
390  
270  
300  
C835  
C820 0.047  
C821 0.047  
C822 0.047  
C823 0.047  
C824 0.047  
0.1  
R822 1k  
R614  
R613  
R612  
R611  
R610  
10V  
C637  
ANA  
R847  
47k  
0.047  
R806  
DISPCE  
DISPDA  
KEYDA  
47k  
EXROM  
C810  
0.047  
RST  
S617  
S616  
Q801  
S615  
S614  
S613  
S612  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
A19  
A18  
A17  
A16  
A15  
A14  
A13  
A12  
RA808  
330  
RA804  
330  
R867  
2.2M  
2SB709A/QR/-X  
R868  
47k  
D801  
RA807  
330  
RA803  
330  
KEYIN  
Q802  
2SB709A/QR/-X  
JS801 QSW0976-001  
IC805  
GP1UM261XK  
MA152WK-X  
R869  
C805  
470P  
47k  
DB0  
DB1  
DB2  
DB3  
DB4  
DB5  
DB6  
DB7  
A11  
A10  
A9  
RA806  
1K  
RA802  
330  
OSC  
C636  
0.047  
A8  
R877  
470  
R899  
0
RES  
CS  
R892  
470k  
A7  
RA805  
1K  
RA801  
330  
PS2  
A6  
Q803  
RS  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
A5  
WR  
RD  
A4  
R878  
IC801  
DB0  
DB1  
DB2  
DB3  
DB4  
DB5  
DB6  
DB7  
PSAVE2  
220K  
Q480  
MN102H60KCN1  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
IC803  
IC-PST3424U-X  
R807  
47k  
L801  
47u  
R840  
100  
Q804  
UN2111-X  
X801  
NAX0652-001X  
C816  
0.47  
C834  
1/16  
C831  
0.1/35  
C832  
30p  
C833  
30p  
TRIMLED  
C817 0.047  
SHEET 3  
2-4  
Printed circuit boards  
Main board  
Main board  
Forward side  
Reverse side  
L1  
J1  
L1  
J1  
C962  
D961  
J321  
J321  
CN141  
D2  
D1  
C3  
PP1  
J801  
D341  
C142  
C141  
L961  
R983  
R978  
D961  
C184  
CN901  
C1  
C2  
CN141  
C165  
C151  
C165  
CN901  
C3  
C4  
C4  
J801  
C163  
C183  
D854  
C164  
C321  
C322  
C891  
D891  
D851  
C164  
D853  
R10  
R141  
C184  
R151  
C312  
C307  
R258  
R353  
C253  
C310  
R882  
R343  
C312  
D3  
R312  
R261  
R273  
C310  
D852  
C167  
R7  
R271  
R272  
C255  
R314  
C257  
R302  
IC251  
C802  
C183  
R163  
C163  
C881  
C881  
R5  
C307  
C302  
R256  
R255  
C259  
C166  
C167  
R6  
D4  
Q7  
Q301  
C317  
C5  
C257  
Q5  
C7  
C259  
R263  
C318  
C302  
C301  
C255  
R186  
C83  
C82  
C92  
R304  
R301  
C5  
C314  
C313  
R3  
C318  
C308  
IC271  
R251  
C91  
C978  
C81  
R303  
C161  
C252  
C301  
C978  
C272  
Q81  
R81  
C181  
C253  
C166  
B1  
C81  
R853 R852 C852  
R276  
B102  
R169  
R310  
R166  
C91  
Q251  
R1  
R2  
C252  
C181  
Q272  
C221  
Q91  
Q252  
PP5  
C317  
R91  
Q53  
Q271  
C308  
C161  
C309  
C6  
C311  
PP5  
C6  
R51  
C311  
C232  
Q57  
C251  
R252  
C51  
C309  
C221  
R52  
C11  
C55  
R11  
C232  
Q56  
C51  
C11  
B3  
C169  
C168  
C319  
R53  
R55  
C53  
C216  
C213  
Q51  
C52  
C909  
R12  
R4  
C8  
C215  
C961  
C367  
C243  
D242 Q241  
R247  
R245 R244  
R243  
C182  
R54  
C168  
C363  
C365  
R809  
R58  
C54  
C361  
Q52  
R902  
R904  
R903  
Q55  
IC201  
R805  
Q901  
C10  
R60  
C216  
C213  
R197  
C367  
C361  
R59  
C909  
C9  
R361  
C371  
IC71  
C241  
C212  
C72  
C369  
C370  
C9  
R366  
R364  
Q902  
R187  
C212  
C371  
R363  
R362  
IC801  
C908  
C182  
R774  
C709  
R792  
R248  
PP4  
PP4  
C369  
C370  
C241  
C201  
R791  
R729  
R798  
C907  
C201  
C242  
R770  
C71  
C242  
C908  
R182  
R188  
R367  
C366  
C162  
C362  
C162  
C905  
C368  
C71  
C244  
C244  
C245  
R780  
R976  
R977  
R773  
R772  
R771  
C851  
R198  
R71  
R799  
R164  
R162  
IC701  
R73  
PP2  
R769  
R768  
R766  
C245  
C901  
Q976  
C368  
B901  
R797  
C362  
C76  
R72  
C77  
C907  
C902  
R701  
C372  
C905  
C701  
C901  
D901  
C75  
C902  
R980 R979  
RA701  
R761  
R757  
R758  
R759  
X701  
Q782  
C783  
Q781  
C782  
C723  
C75  
C372  
C701  
C906  
B701  
R703  
C904  
C903  
D902  
D903  
X1  
C702  
R702  
R712  
Q977  
C781  
R760  
R756  
R755  
R754  
R753  
PP2  
C714  
C382  
R168  
IC951  
C713  
C716  
C715  
D782  
C390  
X702  
C389  
X701  
R167  
CN702  
R714  
C782  
D781  
IC703  
R719  
R720  
R721  
C706  
D982  
C783  
C381  
R741  
C382  
R790  
R789  
R788  
C707  
R749  
R748  
R178  
R387  
R180  
IC381  
C388  
R706  
R179  
C387  
C390  
R384  
Q707  
Q703  
Q705  
R746  
IC951  
C953  
C389  
C381  
IC702  
C951  
C951  
R951  
C710  
D981  
R177  
R386  
C385  
PP3  
R724  
R707  
D701  
R382  
C386  
C706  
R715  
R982  
R926  
C923  
C717  
R742  
R740  
D922  
C391  
C707  
C387  
PP3  
R747  
D951  
C388  
R381  
C710  
C841  
C717  
IC921  
C708  
B704  
C921  
C391  
R739  
C921  
R928  
C922  
R710  
Q706  
Q704  
R728  
B703  
BZ841  
C841  
Q841  
CN701  
C924  
RD  
TD  
VDD  
VPP  
BZ841  
JP1  
RESET  
2-5  
Front board  
Front board  
Forward side  
Reverse side  
D402  
D403  
R607  
R606  
R899  
R608  
S616  
Q404  
D404  
R430  
R429  
D401  
C805  
R836  
R835  
R839  
R838  
C831  
D801  
D808  
Q480  
R873  
Q803  
R842  
C806  
S611  
C637  
R898  
S617  
D400  
S600  
S615  
CN801  
JS801  
L801  
R413  
Q801  
RA807  
R414  
R415  
R416  
R609  
RA803  
R613  
R825  
R824  
RA810  
D 4 5 3  
RA808  
C 4 5 8  
C 4 5 9  
D408  
D407  
R451  
C826  
C825  
D615  
RA802  
RA806  
RA805  
R450  
R449  
R454  
R453  
R452  
R457  
R456  
R455  
R436  
R435  
R434  
R868  
D802  
C 4 5 7  
D811  
RA804  
R427  
CN802  
R872  
IC802  
R433  
R432  
RA809  
R439  
R438  
R437  
RA801  
Q406  
Q403  
R610  
R431  
D803  
R865  
JS801  
Q401  
R837  
R892  
R823  
S613  
D417  
R419  
R601  
R602  
Q407  
D805  
D810  
D809  
IC805  
S610  
S608  
D412  
C636  
S618  
S603  
S609  
S607  
D804  
D806  
C822  
C823  
C810  
R890  
S605  
S602  
S601  
R421  
R422  
D 4 5 1  
IC801  
D425  
R425  
R426  
TH801  
C804  
C 4 5 3  
C 4 5 2  
C 4 5 1  
IC803  
S604  
R614  
C834  
D405  
D406  
Q422  
Q423  
D411  
D420  
D414  
D415  
D413  
D416  
R604  
R603  
D418  
D419  
Mecha control board  
Mecha control board  
Forward side  
Reverse side  
C587  
R583  
R585  
C588  
R584  
R586  
Q502  
C596  
C595  
C539  
R593  
R587  
R589  
R588  
BUSCK  
C536  
C694  
PDET  
TH501  
C535  
C598  
R572  
R615  
C597  
R592  
Q571  
R605  
R606  
CN601  
C513  
R559  
R560  
C573  
R616  
IC573  
C574  
Q572  
L571  
IC601  
R608  
R607  
RFDC  
SEL  
TEB  
R614  
R558  
R561  
C551  
R502  
R503  
R609  
R576  
R668  
L573  
C578  
C576  
R577  
R540  
R548  
R523  
R564  
R566  
R565  
C608  
RFGC  
C685  
C686  
Q573  
R579  
R578  
C683  
R532  
C616  
R F R P  
C663  
R555  
R556  
R557  
C623  
C624  
R552  
Q574  
R518  
R517  
R519  
R520  
R521  
R522  
C632  
C631  
R524  
R526  
R539  
R563  
R686  
C655  
R630  
R631  
R507  
R533  
R534  
R528  
R530  
R506  
C504  
C621  
R623  
R651  
C654  
R527  
R529  
R531  
R635  
R636  
R621  
R622  
R535  
C664  
R675  
C675  
C646  
R637  
R689  
C681  
Q681  
R536  
R537  
C505  
R508  
L621  
C676  
R544  
R543  
R504  
R505  
R511  
C507  
C682 L622  
C644  
R642  
R640  
R641  
L623  
R515  
Q652  
D681  
C501  
R514  
C652  
C674  
B681  
C509  
R549  
C502  
L501  
2-6  
< M E M O >  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
AV & MULTIMEDIA COMPANY CAR ELECTRONICS CATEGORY 10-1,1chome,Ohwatari-machi,Maebashi-city,371-8543,Japan  
Printed in Japan  
WPC  
(No.MA063SCH)  
PARTS LIST  
[ KD-LH401 ]  
* All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts.  
Area suffix  
E ----------- Continental Europe  
EX --------------- Central Europe  
- Contents -  
3- 2  
3- 5  
3- 7  
3-16  
Exploded view of general assembly and parts list (Block No.M1)  
CD mechanism assembly and parts list (Block No.MB)  
Electrical parts list (Block No.01~03)  
Packing materials and accessories parts list (Block No.M3)  
MA063  
3-1  
Exploded view of general assembly and parts list  
M 1 M  
M
Block No.  
39  
40  
26  
18  
41  
17  
B
6
A
39  
9
5
7
F
11  
10  
14  
36  
21  
F'  
C
20  
28  
16  
E
D
16  
15  
G
G'  
29  
7
24 22  
28  
84  
12  
42  
24  
66  
85  
42  
Mecha control board  
66  
42  
44  
79  
67  
100  
78  
65  
Front board  
44  
69  
68  
55  
53  
50  
48  
51  
54  
74  
77  
1
62  
59  
73  
52  
76  
60  
58  
75  
64  
49  
47  
70  
63  
57  
56  
46  
80  
61  
83  
72  
71  
3-2  
1 M  
M
b
88  
87  
95  
92  
43  
43  
99  
97  
B
86  
6
A
9
J
98  
a
H
93  
7
90  
89  
11  
10  
14  
91  
34  
27  
94  
15  
8
G
G'  
34  
H
96  
b
J
a
12  
Main board  
c
32  
31  
32  
2
c
3
66  
1
G
13  
F
65  
30  
25  
38  
19  
74  
D
77  
13  
35  
38  
37  
C
E
F'  
4
33  
G'  
35  
81  
30  
23  
45  
82  
3-3  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
General Assembly  
Block No. [M][1][M][M]  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
LV42884-001A  
LV42995-002A  
LV42955-002A  
LV43084-001A  
LV40848-034A  
LV40846-036A  
GE31169-001A  
LV41843-002A  
QLD0232-001  
QUQ105-2207AE  
VYSH101-009  
QAM0547-001  
QAM0464-002  
VYTA500-001  
QNZ0664-001  
QAL0536-001  
QMFZ047-150-T  
GE31205-001A  
GE40207-001A  
GE40208-001A  
QYSDSF2606Z  
QYSDST2604Z  
QYSDST2606Z  
GE40214-001A  
QYSDST2604Z  
LV43920-001A  
LCD FILTER  
LCD FILTER  
LENS SHEET  
DOUBLE FACE  
SPACER(P)  
SPACER(F)  
NAME PLATE  
LASER CAUTION  
LCD MODULE  
FFC WIRE  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GE20156-001A  
FSYH4036-100  
GE30968-001A  
GE30964-001A  
GE30975-001A  
FSYH4036-100  
GE40218-012A  
GE30972-001A  
GE30973-001A  
GE40192-001A  
GE40193-001A  
WDL123525  
GEAR BKT UNIT  
SHEET  
LEVER BKT UNIT  
LOWER LEVER ASS  
FRONT BKT ASSY  
SHEET  
SHEET  
(x2)  
SPACER  
DETACH LEVER  
KICK LEVER  
SHAFT  
SUBWOOFER CABEL  
STEERING REMOTE  
PIN CAP  
CAR CONNECTOR  
FPC  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
(x2)  
15A  
SHAFT  
SLIT WASHER  
WASHER  
(x2)  
(x2)  
WDL215025  
FUSE  
GE40194-001A  
GE40195-002A  
GE40218-009A  
GE10073-004A  
GE40135-001A  
GE10074-001A  
GE10075-001A  
GE40156-001A  
GE40224-001A  
GE30974-001A  
GE40196-001A  
GE31204-003A  
GE31206-002A  
GE40107-002A  
QYSPSP2003M  
QYSPSTU2040M  
LV42181-002A  
LV40865-001A  
LV40865-001A  
LV40865-001A  
LV41200-001A  
QYSDST2606Z  
QYSDST2604Z  
QYSDST2604Z  
GE40231-001A  
FSKZ4005-002  
QYSDST2610Z  
QYSDST2610Z  
QYSDST2604Z  
QYSDST2604Z  
QYSDST2004Z  
GE40218-011A  
GE10082-007A  
GE31177-004A  
GE30832-002A  
GE30856-001A  
GE30859-001A  
GE30834-001A  
GE30836-001A  
GE31200-003A  
GE20152-001A  
GE31172-003A  
GE31174-003A  
FSKW3002-012  
GE30835-001A  
FSYH4036-013  
GE30937-002A  
GE30858-003A  
GE30860-001A  
GE30861-002A  
GE31173-001A  
GE31203-006A  
VKZ4777-001  
T SPRING  
T SPRING  
SHEET  
REAR BRACKET  
POWER IC BKT  
REG IC BKT  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
WIRE HOLDER  
SCREW  
SPACER  
(x2)  
TOP CHASSIS  
EARTH PLATE  
BOTTOM CHASSIS  
F CHASSIS  
BLIND  
2.6mm x 6mm  
2.6mm x 4mm  
2.6mm x 6mm  
2.6mm x 4mm  
MIRROR SHEET  
FPC GUIDE  
ABSORBER  
INSULATOR  
HEAT SINK  
HEAT SINK  
SCREW  
(x2)  
(x2)  
2mm x 3mm(x2)  
TAP SCREW  
SPECIAL SCREW  
MINI SCREW  
MINI SCREW  
MINI SCREW  
SPECIAL SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SHEET  
M2 x 4mm(x2)  
(x2)  
(x2)  
(x3)  
(x2)  
2.6mm x 6mm(x2)  
2.6mm x 4mm  
2.6mm x 4mm  
(x2)  
(x2)  
2.6mm x 10mm(x2)  
2.6mm x 10mm  
2.6mm x 4mm(x3)  
2.6mm x 4mm(x2)  
2mm x 4mm(x5)  
FRONT PANEL  
FINDER ASSY  
POWER BUTTON  
KNOB  
SEL BUTTON  
RIM LENS  
RIM COVER(L)  
RESET BUTTON  
PRESET BUTTON  
EQ BUTTON  
DETACH BUTTON  
COMP.SPRING  
NAV BUTTON  
SHEET  
NAVI BASE  
RIM COVER(R)  
FM/AM BUTTON  
EQ BUTTON  
EJECT BUTTON  
R.COVER ASSY  
MINI SCREW  
SHEET  
(x4)  
(x2)  
GE40218-005A  
GE40218-008A  
LV43889-001A  
GE40204-001A  
GE31175-001A  
GE40218-007A  
GE30984-005A  
LV33404-001A  
SHEET  
SW PWB SHEET  
JVC BADGE  
LCD CASE  
SHEET  
LCD LENS  
LIGHTING CASE  
3-4  
CD mechanism assembly and parts list  
M B M M  
Block No.  
Grease  
TNG-87  
TN-2001-1013  
GP-501MK  
CFD-005Z  
GP-501A  
111  
34  
2
74  
72  
35  
26  
33  
31  
22  
111  
73  
111  
C
36  
85  
37  
15  
29  
116  
25  
A
19  
112  
23  
38  
B
114  
13  
61  
27  
21  
30  
24  
11  
62  
75  
A
112  
32  
D
99  
28  
76  
38  
115  
83  
12  
86  
D
C
95  
18  
98  
B
93  
32  
20  
87  
90  
89  
121  
16  
96  
122  
83  
100  
14  
100  
97  
82  
17  
125  
94  
124  
88  
101  
a
4
123  
92  
113  
91  
94  
111  
81  
84  
1
93  
73  
74  
75  
77  
3
111  
71  
3
a
111  
3-5  
CD mechanism  
Block No. [M][B][M][M]  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
1
2
3
4
11  
30320101T  
30320102T  
30320115T  
30320116T  
303205505T  
303205503T  
303205301T  
303205302T  
30320502T  
30320503T  
30320505T  
30320506T  
30320507T  
30320509T  
30320510T  
30320511T  
30320513T  
30320514T  
30320518T  
30320519T  
30320520T  
30320521T  
30320522T  
30320525T  
30320526T  
30320538T  
30320529T  
30320530T  
30320531T  
30320523T  
30320524T  
30320539T  
69011614T  
64180406T  
303210302T  
30321002T  
30321003T  
30321005T  
30321009T  
30321011T  
19501403T  
303211301T  
303211501T  
303211302T  
303211502T  
303211303T  
30321101T  
30321102T  
30321103T  
30321104T  
30321105T  
30321106T  
30321107T  
30321111T  
30321114T  
30321116T  
30321117T  
30321118T  
30321125T  
30321131T  
30321133T  
18211223T  
9P0420031T  
9P0420041T  
9B0320041T  
9C0117183T  
9C0120203T  
9C0317503T  
9W0130170T  
9W0513060T  
9W0710070T  
9E0100152T  
9W0113020T  
FRAME  
TOP COVER  
DANPER F  
DANPER R  
CHASSIS RIVET  
CHANGE P. RVT A  
CLAMPER ASSY  
SPINDLE MOTOR A  
CLAMPER ARM  
CHANGE GEAR SPG  
CHANGE GEAR 2  
FEED GEAR  
(x2)  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
61  
62  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
FEED RACK  
CHANGE LOCK RAR  
FEED SW HOLDER  
PU SHAFT HOLDER  
CLAMPER SUB SPG  
FD SUB HOLDER  
TOP PLATE  
SELECT LOCK ARM  
TRIGGER ARM  
SLIDE HOOK  
PU SHAFT  
CLAMPER ARM SPG  
SELECT L ARM SP  
SUSPENSION SP R (x2)  
SELECT ARM R  
LINK PLATE  
LINK PLATE SPG  
CUSHION F  
CUSHION R  
(x2)  
SUSPENSION SP L (x2)  
PICKUP OPT-725  
DET SW ESE22  
CONN BOARD ASSY  
MODE SW  
LOAD MOTOR WIRE  
MODE SW WIRE  
SL WIRE  
WIRE HOLDER  
WIRE CLUMPER  
ROLLER SHAFT AS  
L GEAR PLATE RV  
LOADING PLATE A  
LOCK ARM RV ASS  
L/F MOTOR ASSY  
LOADING GEAR 1  
LOADING GEAR 2  
LOADING GEAR 3  
LOADING GEAR 4  
LOADING GEAR 5  
LOADING GEAR 6  
LOADING GEAR 7  
ROLLER GUIDE  
(x2)  
ROLLER GUIDE SP (x2)  
DISC STOPPER AR  
DISC ST ARM SPG  
LD GEAR BRACKET  
L SIDE PLATE  
LOAD PLATE SPG  
LDG ROLLER  
COLLAR SCREW  
SCREW  
TAP.SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
SCREW  
PW 3.5X8X0.3  
HL WASHER  
L WASHER  
E RING  
(x2)  
(x6)  
(x2)  
(x2)  
PW 2.1X4X0.13  
3-6  
Electrical parts list  
Main board  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
Block No. [0][1][0][0]  
D705  
D706  
D707  
D708  
D709  
D710  
D714  
D715  
D781  
D782  
D853  
D854  
D891  
D892  
D901  
D902  
D921  
D922  
D951  
D961  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
UDZS11B-X  
RB160M-30-X  
RB160M-30-X  
MA111-X  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
Z DIODE  
SB DIODE  
SB DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SB DIODE  
SI DIODE  
Z DIODE  
DIODE  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
IC71  
SAA6579T-X  
TDA7404D-X  
M62449FP-X  
NJM4565M-WE  
CD4066BPW-X  
LA47515  
NJM2160AV-X  
NJM2160AV-X  
UPD784217AGC268 IC  
IC-PST3433U-X  
BR24L32F-W-X  
HD74HC126FP-X  
AN80T07A  
NJM2360AM-X  
BA6956AN  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC161  
IC201  
IC251  
IC271  
IC301  
IC361  
IC381  
IC701  
IC702  
IC703  
IC801  
IC901  
IC921  
IC951  
IC  
IC  
IC  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
RB160M-30-X  
MA111-X  
REGULATOR IC  
IC  
IC  
UDZS3.9B-X  
1N5404-TU-15  
Q5  
Q6  
Q7  
Q51  
Q52  
Q53  
Q54  
Q55  
2SB624/4/-X  
2SB624/4/-X  
UN2211-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
UN2211-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
UN2111-X  
UN2111-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
UN2111-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
KTD1304-X  
KTD1304-X  
KTD1304-X  
KTD1304-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2214-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2213-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2111-X  
UN2111-X  
UN2211-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
UN2211-X  
2SB624/4/-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
DIGI TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
DIGI TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
B5  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
C8  
C9  
C51  
C52  
C53  
C54  
C55  
C71  
C72  
C73  
C74  
C75  
C76  
C77  
C81  
C82  
NDC31HJ-560X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31HK-103X  
QERF1AM-476Z  
QERF1AM-476Z  
QERF1AM-107Z  
QERF1AM-107Z  
NCB31EK-473X  
NDC31HJ-331X  
QERF1HM-104Z  
QERF1HM-474Z  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31HK-472X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31CK-104X  
QERF1HM-225Z  
NCB31EK-223X  
NDC31HJ-561X  
NCB31HK-103X  
QERF0JM-476Z  
NDC31HJ-470X  
NDC31HJ-820X  
QERF1EM-475Z  
NCB31EK-153X  
QERF1EM-475Z  
NCB31EK-153X  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1CM-106Z  
QERF1CM-476Z  
QERF1AM-107Z  
NCB31HK-472X  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1HM-225Z  
NCB31CK-823X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31EK-273X  
NCB31CK-393X  
NCB31HK-123X  
NCB31HK-153X  
NCB31HK-472X  
NCB31HK-682X  
NCB31HK-182X  
NCB31HK-272X  
QERF1HM-225Z  
QERF1EM-475Z  
NCB31CK-473X  
NCB31CK-473X  
QERF1CM-106Z  
QERF1HM-225Z  
NCB31CK-823X  
NCB31CK-104X  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
56pF 50V J  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
47uF 10V M  
47uF 10V M  
100uF 10V M  
100uF 10V M  
0.047uF 25V K  
330pF 50V J  
0.1uF 50V M  
0.47uF 50V M  
0.1uF 16V K  
4700pF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
2.2uF 50V M  
0.022uF 25V K  
560pF 50V J  
0.01uF 50V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
47pF 50V J  
Q56  
Q81  
Q91  
Q241  
Q251  
Q252  
Q271  
Q272  
Q301  
Q321  
Q331  
Q341  
Q351  
Q701  
Q702  
Q703  
Q704  
Q705  
Q706  
Q707  
Q781  
Q782  
Q841  
Q881  
Q891  
Q901  
Q902  
Q951  
Q976  
Q977  
82pF 50V J  
4.7uF 25V M  
0.015uF 25V K  
4.7uF 25V M  
0.015uF 25V K  
1uF 50V M  
C91  
C92  
C161  
C162  
C163  
C166  
C167  
C168  
C169  
C181  
C182  
C183  
C201  
C202  
C203  
C204  
C205  
C206  
C207  
C208  
C209  
C210  
C211  
C212  
C213  
C214  
C215  
C216  
C221  
C222  
C223  
1uF 50V M  
1uF 50V M  
10uF 16V M  
47uF 16V M  
100uF 10V M  
4700pF 50V K  
1uF 50V M  
1uF 50V M  
1uF 50V M  
UN2213-X  
2SB709A/QR/-X  
2.2uF 50V M  
0.082uF 16V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
0.027uF 25V K  
0.039uF 16V K  
0.012uF 50V K  
0.015uF 50V K  
4700pF 50V K  
6800pF 50V K  
1800pF 50V K  
2700pF 50V K  
2.2uF 50V M  
4.7uF 25V M  
0.047uF 16V K  
0.047uF 16V K  
10uF 16V M  
2.2uF 50V M  
0.082uF 16V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
D241  
D242  
D252  
D253  
D301  
D321  
D331  
D341  
D351  
D701  
D702  
D703  
D704  
3-7  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
C224  
C225  
C226  
C227  
C228  
C229  
C230  
C231  
C232  
C241  
C242  
C243  
C244  
C245  
C251  
C252  
C253  
C255  
C256  
C257  
C259  
C261  
C262  
C271  
C272  
C273  
C274  
C275  
C301  
C302  
C303  
C304  
C305  
C306  
C307  
C308  
C309  
C310  
C311  
C312  
C313  
C314  
C315  
C316  
C317  
C318  
C319  
C320  
C321  
C322  
C361  
C362  
C363  
C364  
C365  
C366  
C367  
C368  
C369  
C370  
C371  
C372  
C381  
C382  
C383  
C384  
C385  
C386  
C387  
C388  
C389  
C390  
C391  
C701  
C702  
C703  
C704  
C705  
NCB31EK-273X  
NCB31CK-393X  
NCB31HK-123X  
NCB31HK-153X  
NCB31HK-472X  
NCB31HK-682X  
NCB31HK-182X  
NCB31HK-272X  
QERF1HM-225Z  
QERF1HM-225Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
NCB31EK-473X  
QERF1CM-226Z  
QERF1HM-224Z  
NCB31HK-822X  
QERF1HM-225Z  
QERF0JM-107Z  
QERF1CM-476Z  
NCB31EK-823X  
QERF1HM-225Z  
QERF0JM-476Z  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-103X  
NCB31HK-562X  
NCB31EK-333X  
NCB31EK-273X  
NCB31EK-273X  
QFV61HJ-474Z  
QFV61HJ-474Z  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NCB31EK-104X  
NCB31EK-104X  
QERF1EM-475Z  
QERF1EM-475Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QFV61HJ-474Z  
QFV61HJ-474Z  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NCB31EK-104X  
NCB31EK-104X  
QERF1CM-107Z  
QERF1CM-226Z  
NCB31EK-223X  
NCB31EK-223X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NCB31EK-473X  
QERF1EM-475Z  
QERF1EM-475Z  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31HK-152X  
NCB31HK-152X  
QERF1AM-107Z  
QERF1AM-107Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1CM-476Z  
QERF1AM-107Z  
QERF1EM-475Z  
QERF1EM-475Z  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31HK-152X  
NCB31HK-152X  
QERF1AM-107Z  
QERF1AM-107Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1HM-105Z  
QERF1CM-476Z  
QERF1AM-227Z  
NCB31HK-103X  
NDC31HJ-471X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31EK-473X  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
MF CAPACITOR  
MF CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
MF CAPACITOR  
MF CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
0.027uF 25V K  
0.039uF 16V K  
0.012uF 50V K  
0.015uF 50V K  
4700pF 50V K  
6800pF 50V K  
1800pF 50V K  
2700pF 50V K  
2.2uF 50V M  
2.2uF 50V M  
1uF 50V M  
0.047uF 25V K  
22uF 16V M  
0.22uF 50V M  
8200pF 50V K  
2.2uF 50V M  
100uF 6.3V M  
47uF 16V M  
0.082uF 25V K  
2.2uF 50V M  
47uF 6.3V M  
100pF 50V J  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.01uF 25V K  
5600pF 50V K  
0.033uF 25V K  
0.027uF 25V K  
0.027uF 25V K  
0.47uF 50V J  
0.47uF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
0.1uF 25V K  
0.1uF 25V K  
4.7uF 25V M  
4.7uF 25V M  
1uF 50V M  
C706  
C707  
C708  
C709  
C710  
C711  
C712  
C713  
C714  
C715  
C716  
C717  
C718  
C719  
C720  
C721  
C722  
C781  
C782  
C783  
C801  
C802  
C841  
C852  
C881  
C891  
C901  
C902  
C903  
C904  
C905  
C906  
C907  
C908  
C909  
C910  
C921  
C922  
C923  
C924  
C951  
C955  
C961  
C962  
C978  
C991  
C992  
C993  
C994  
C995  
C996  
C997  
C998  
QERF0JM-107Z  
QERF1AM-227Z  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31CK-104X  
QERF1AM-227Z  
NCB31EK-473X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-8R0X  
NDC31HJ-270X  
NDC31HJ-270X  
NDC31HJ-220X  
QERF0JM-476Z  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31CK-224X  
QERF0JM-107Z  
QERF1CM-107Z  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
QERF1HM-105Z  
NCB31CK-104X  
QERF1CM-226Z  
NCB31EK-104X  
QERF1AM-227Z  
QERF1AM-227Z  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31CK-104X  
QERF1CM-226Z  
NCB31HK-103X  
QERF1CM-106Z  
QERF1AM-107Z  
QERF1CM-226Z  
NCB31AK-474X  
QERF1AM-227Z  
QERF1CM-107Z  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31HK-272X  
QERF1AM-227Z  
NDC31HJ-560X  
QEZ0675-338  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
100uF 6.3V M  
220uF 10V M  
0.1uF 16V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
220uF 10V M  
0.047uF 25V K  
100pF 50V J  
8pF 50V J  
27pF 50V J  
27pF 50V J  
22pF 50V J  
47uF 6.3V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.22uF 16V K  
100uF 6.3V M  
100uF 16V M  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
1uF 50V M  
0.1uF 16V K  
22uF 16V M  
0.1uF 25V K  
220uF 10V M  
220uF 10V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
22uF 16V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
10uF 16V M  
100uF 10V M  
22uF 16V M  
0.47uF 10V K  
220uF 10V M  
100uF 16V M  
0.047uF 25V K  
2700pF 50V K  
220uF 10V M  
56pF 50V J  
1uF 50V M  
0.47uF 50V J  
0.47uF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
0.1uF 25V K  
0.1uF 25V K  
100uF 16V M  
22uF 16V M  
0.022uF 25V K  
0.022uF 25V K  
100pF 50V J  
0.047uF 25V K  
4.7uF 25V M  
4.7uF 25V M  
0.1uF 16V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
1500pF 50V K  
1500pF 50V K  
100uF 10V M  
100uF 10V M  
1uF 50V M  
3300uF  
NCB31EK-104X  
QERF1HM-225Z  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
0.1uF 25V K  
2.2uF 50V M  
100pF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
R1  
R2  
R3  
R4  
R5  
R6  
R7  
R8  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-270X  
NRSA63J-100X  
NRSA63J-393X  
NRSA02J-220X  
NRSA02J-220X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-332X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-471X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-393X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-102X  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
47k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
27  
Ω
10  
39k  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/10W J  
1/10W J  
22  
Ω
1uF 50V M  
22Ω  
47uF 16V M  
100uF 10V M  
4.7uF 25V M  
4.7uF 25V M  
0.1uF 16V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
1500pF 50V K  
1500pF 50V K  
100uF 10V M  
100uF 10V M  
1uF 50V M  
47k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
4.7k  
Ω
R9  
47k  
3.3k  
Ω
R10  
R11  
R51  
R52  
R53  
R54  
R55  
R56  
R57  
R58  
R59  
R61  
R71  
R72  
R73  
Ω
10k  
470  
Ω
Ω
10k  
10k  
10k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
2.2k  
Ω
47k  
39k  
47k  
Ω
1uF 50V M  
Ω
47uF 16V M  
220uF 10V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
470pF 50V J  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
Ω
4.7k  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
0
1k  
2.2k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1kΩ  
1/16W J  
3-8  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
R74  
R81  
R82  
R83  
R91  
R92  
R93  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-273X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-273X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-123X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-123X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-124X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-184X  
NRSA63J-223X  
NRSA63J-123X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-274X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-562X  
NRSA63J-153X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-181X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-105X  
NRSA63J-105X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-105X  
NRSA63J-105X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-273X  
NRSA63J-273X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-273X  
NRSA63J-273X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-181X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-181X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-181X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-181X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-223X  
NRSA63J-223X  
NRSA63J-333X  
NRSA63J-333X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-223X  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
100  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
R382  
R383  
R384  
R386  
R387  
R702  
R703  
R704  
R705  
R706  
R707  
R708  
R709  
R710  
R711  
R712  
R713  
R714  
R715  
R716  
R717  
R718  
R719  
R720  
R721  
R722  
R723  
R725  
R726  
R727  
R728  
R729  
R730  
R731  
R732  
R733  
R734  
R735  
R736  
R737  
R738  
R739  
R740  
R741  
R742  
R745  
R746  
R747  
R748  
R749  
R750  
R751  
R752  
R753  
R754  
R755  
R756  
R757  
R758  
R759  
R760  
R761  
R762  
R763  
R764  
R766  
R767  
R768  
R769  
R770  
R771  
R772  
R773  
R774  
R776  
R777  
R778  
R780  
NRSA63J-223X  
NRSA63J-333X  
NRSA63J-333X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-106X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-223X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-392X  
NRSA63J-682X  
NRSA63J-392X  
NRSA63J-682X  
NRSA63J-392X  
NRSA63J-682X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-271X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-271X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-331X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
22k  
33k  
33k  
47k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
10k  
Ω
27kΩ  
4.7k  
Ω
10k  
27k  
4.7k  
Ω
Ω
820  
47k  
10M  
Ω
Ω
Ω
R162  
R163  
R164  
R166  
R167  
R168  
R169  
R170  
R171  
R177  
R178  
R182  
R183  
R184  
R186  
R187  
R188  
R197  
R198  
R241  
R242  
R243  
R244  
R245  
R246  
R247  
R248  
R251  
R252  
R253  
R254  
R255  
R256  
R257  
R258  
R259  
R260  
R261  
R262  
R263  
R271  
R272  
R273  
R274  
R275  
R276  
R301  
R302  
R307  
R308  
R311  
R312  
R321  
R322  
R323  
R331  
R332  
R333  
R341  
R342  
R343  
R351  
R352  
R353  
R361  
R362  
R363  
R364  
R366  
R367  
R381  
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
0
12k  
Ω
1/16W J  
10kΩ  
2.2kΩ  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
10k  
47k  
Ω
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1kΩ  
1kΩ  
10k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
2.2k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
2.2k  
Ω
Ω
47k  
Ω
2.2k  
100k  
100k  
1k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
1kΩ  
1/16W J  
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
2.2k  
Ω
1/16W J  
0
12k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1k  
47k  
22k  
4.7k  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
10k  
Ω
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1kΩ  
4.7k  
100k  
100k  
120k  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
10k  
Ω
1k  
1k  
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
47k  
180k  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
47k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
22k  
Ω
1k  
Ω
12k  
390  
Ω
0
1k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1k  
270k  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
0Ω  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1kΩ  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
100k  
1kΩ  
47k  
100k  
Ω
3.9k  
6.8k  
3.9k  
6.8k  
3.9k  
6.8k  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
0
10k  
10k  
100k  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
5.6k  
10k  
270  
Ω
15k  
Ω
Ω
47k  
820  
Ω
10k  
270  
1k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
180  
4.7k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
1M  
1M  
47k  
1M  
1M  
Ω
0Ω  
0Ω  
0Ω  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
2.2k  
2.2k  
2.2k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
47k  
27k  
27k  
10k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
10k  
10k  
10k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1k  
27k  
27k  
820  
Ω
1/16W J  
1k  
1k  
1k  
1k  
1k  
1k  
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
180  
10k  
820  
Ω
Ω
Ω
180  
100  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
10k  
820  
Ω
1kΩ  
1kΩ  
1kΩ  
1kΩ  
Ω
Ω
180  
10k  
820  
Ω
Ω
Ω
10k  
1/16W J  
330 1/16W J  
1k 1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
180  
0Ω  
10k  
22k  
22k  
33k  
33k  
47k  
47k  
22k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
47k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
47k  
Ω
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1kΩ  
47k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1kΩ  
1/16W J  
3-9  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
Front board  
Block No. [0][2][0][0]  
R788  
R789  
R790  
R791  
R792  
R794  
R796  
R797  
R801  
R802  
R803  
R804  
R805  
R806  
R807  
R808  
R809  
R810  
R841  
R852  
R853  
R881  
R882  
R883  
R892  
R893  
R901  
R902  
R903  
R904  
R905  
R906  
R921  
R922  
R923  
R924  
R925  
R926  
R927  
R951  
R976  
R977  
R978  
R979  
R980  
R981  
R982  
R983  
RA701  
VR921  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-223X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-331X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-223X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-332X  
NRSA02J-222X  
NRSA02J-222X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-562X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA02J-100X  
NRSA02J-100X  
NRSA02J-100X  
NRSA02J-100X  
NRSA63J-181X  
NRSA63D-473X  
NRSA63D-472X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-682X  
NRSA63J-183X  
NRS181J-222X  
NRSA63J-912X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-223X  
NRS181J-222X  
NRZ0065-222X  
NVP1505-473X  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
NET RESISTOR  
TRIM RESISTOR  
47k  
47k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/10W J  
1/10W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
1k  
Ω
1kΩ  
IC801  
IC802  
IC803  
IC804  
IC805  
MN102H60KCN2  
LH28F160BJHET95  
IC-PST3424U-X  
NJU7241F33-X  
GP1UM261XK  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
47k  
47k  
10k  
22k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
IR DETECT UNIT  
38kHz  
100k  
100  
47k  
10k  
100k  
330  
100  
22k  
47k  
3.3k  
2.2k  
2.2k  
100k  
4.7k  
47k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
Q400  
Q401  
Q402  
Q403  
Q404  
Q405  
Q406  
Q407  
Q408  
Q409  
Q410  
Q411  
Q412  
Q413  
Q420  
Q421  
Q422  
Q423  
Q424  
Q425  
Q480  
Q801  
Q802  
Q803  
Q804  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2211-X  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
2SB709A/QR/-X  
2SB709A/QR/-X  
2SD601A/QR/-X  
UN2111-X  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1k  
47k  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/10W J  
1/10W J  
1/10W J  
1/10W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
5.6k  
1k  
Ω
10k  
47k  
47k  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
10  
10  
10  
10  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
180  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W D  
1/16W D  
D400  
D401  
D402  
D403  
D404  
D405  
D406  
D407  
D408  
D409  
D410  
D411  
D412  
D413  
D414  
D415  
D416  
D417  
D418  
D419  
D420  
D421  
D422  
D423  
D424  
D425  
D429  
D430  
D431  
D451  
D453  
D801  
D802  
D803  
D804  
D805  
D806  
D807  
D808  
D809  
D810  
D811  
MA152WK-X  
SI DIODE  
LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
BLUE LED  
BLUE LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
47k  
4.7k  
Ω
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-A12BC2T-X  
SML-A12BC2T-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
SML-310LT/MN/-X  
CL-190UB2-X-X  
CL-190UB2-X-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
Ω
1k  
6.8k  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/8W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
18k  
Ω
2.2k  
9.1k  
4.7k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
0
22k  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/8W J  
2.2k  
2.2k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
L1  
QQL244J-4R7Z  
QQL244J-470Z  
QQL244J-470Z  
QQL244J-470Z  
QQL244J-4R7Z  
NQLZ007-151X  
QQR1378-002  
INDUCTIOR  
COIL  
COIL  
COIL  
INDUCTIOR  
COIL  
4.7uH J  
47uH J  
47uH J  
47uH J  
4.7uH J  
150uH  
L701  
L702  
L703  
L921  
L922  
L961  
LED  
LED  
LED  
LED  
COIL  
LED  
BZ841  
CN251  
CN701  
CN702  
CN901  
CN951  
CN952  
CN981  
J1  
J321  
J801  
PP1  
PP2  
QAN0023-001Z  
QGA2501C1-03  
QGF1041C1-16W  
QGB2027M4-22S  
QNZ0650-001  
QGA2501F1-02  
QJB005-040909  
QGA2006F1-02  
QAM0556-001  
QNN0490-001  
QNZ0095-001  
QZW0010-001  
QZW0010-001  
QZW0010-001  
QAU0203-002  
QAX0263-001Z  
QAX0617-001Z  
QAX0401-001  
BUZZER  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
LED  
CONNECTOR  
CONNECTOR  
CONNECTOR  
CAR CONNECTOR  
CONNECTOR  
SIN ID C-B WIRE  
CONNECTOR  
ANT CABLE  
PIN JACK  
CONNECTOR  
STYLE PIN  
STYLE PIN  
STYLE PIN  
TUNER  
W-B (1-3)  
FFC/FPC (1-16)  
B-B (1-22)  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
W-B (1-2)  
W-B (1-2)  
MA8062/M/-X  
NSCM315C-W  
NSCM315C-W  
MA152WK-X  
MA111-X  
MA111-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
MA8062/M/-X  
LED  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
SI DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
Z DIODE  
PP3  
TU1  
X71  
X701  
X702  
CRYSTAL  
CRYSTAL  
CRYSTAL  
4.332MHz  
12.500MHz  
32.768KHz  
3-10  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Z DIODE  
Description  
Local  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
D812  
MA8062/M/-X  
R437  
R438  
R439  
R449  
R450  
R451  
R452  
R453  
R454  
R455  
R456  
R457  
R479  
R601  
R602  
R603  
R604  
R605  
R606  
R607  
R608  
R609  
R610  
R611  
R612  
R613  
R614  
R616  
R801  
R803  
R804  
R806  
R807  
R816  
R817  
R818  
R819  
R821  
R822  
R823  
R824  
R825  
R826  
R827  
R828  
R829  
R830  
R835  
R836  
R837  
R838  
R839  
R840  
R841  
R842  
R843  
R844  
R845  
R846  
R847  
R865  
R866  
R867  
R868  
R869  
R870  
R872  
R873  
R874  
R877  
R878  
R891  
R892  
R895  
R896  
R897  
R898  
R899  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-561X  
NRSA63J-561X  
NRSA63J-561X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-301X  
NRSA63J-271X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-561X  
NRSA63J-301X  
NRSA63J-271X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-561X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-301X  
NRSA63J-271X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-561X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-152X  
NRSA63J-331X  
NRSA63J-331X  
NRSA63J-331X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-822X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-152X  
NRSA63J-152X  
NRSA63J-152X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-225X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-474X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-471X  
NRSA63J-224X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-474X  
NRSA63J-331X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-331X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
390  
390  
390  
390  
390  
390  
560  
560  
560  
390  
390  
390  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
C451  
C452  
C453  
C457  
C458  
C459  
C636  
C637  
C801  
C802  
C804  
C805  
C806  
C807  
C808  
C809  
C810  
C811  
C812  
C813  
C814  
C815  
C816  
C817  
C818  
C819  
C820  
C821  
C822  
C823  
C824  
C825  
C826  
C827  
C828  
C829  
C831  
C834  
C835  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NBE20JM-106X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NDC31HJ-471X  
NDC31HJ-471X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NBE20JM-475X  
NBE20JM-475X  
NBE20JM-475X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NBE20JM-475X  
NBE20JM-106X  
NCB31AK-474X  
NCB31AK-474X  
NCB31AK-474X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NBE20JM-106X  
NBE20JM-106X  
NCB31EK-473X  
NBE20JM-106X  
NBE20JM-475X  
NBE21VM-104X  
NBE21CM-105X  
NCB31EK-104X  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
10uF 6.3V M  
0.047uF 25V K  
470pF 50V J  
1kΩ  
1/16W J  
470pF 50V J  
300  
270  
390  
560  
300  
270  
390  
560  
820  
300  
270  
390  
560  
820  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
0.047uF 25V K  
4.7uF 6.3V M  
4.7uF 6.3V M  
4.7uF 6.3V M  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
4.7uF 6.3V M  
10uF 6.3V M  
0.47uF 10V K  
0.47uF 10V K  
0.47uF 10V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
0.047uF 25V K  
10uF 6.3V M  
10uF 6.3V M  
0.047uF 25V K  
10uF 6.3V M  
4.7uF 6.3V M  
0.1uF 35V M  
1uF 16V M  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1.5k  
Ω
330  
330  
330  
Ω
Ω
Ω
47k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
1k  
1k  
1k  
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
8.2k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1k  
Ω
1kΩ  
0.1uF 25V K  
100k  
100k  
100k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
R401  
R402  
R403  
R404  
R405  
R406  
R407  
R408  
R409  
R410  
R411  
R412  
R413  
R414  
R415  
R416  
R417  
R418  
R419  
R420  
R421  
R422  
R423  
R424  
R425  
R426  
R427  
R428  
R429  
R430  
R431  
R432  
R433  
R434  
R435  
R436  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-122X  
NRSA63J-122X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-471X  
NRSA63J-471X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-681X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-391X  
NRSA63J-561X  
NRSA63J-561X  
NRSA63J-561X  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
1k  
1k  
1.2k  
1.2k  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1kΩ  
Ω
47k  
47k  
10k  
10k  
10k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
820  
820  
680  
680  
820  
820  
820  
820  
680  
680  
680  
680  
680  
680  
680  
680  
680  
680  
820  
820  
820  
820  
470  
470  
680  
680  
390  
390  
390  
560  
560  
560  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1kΩ  
100  
1.5k  
1.5k  
1.5k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
47k  
47k  
10k  
47k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
2.2k  
Ω
Ω
2.2M  
47k  
47k  
470k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
47k  
Ω
47kΩ  
100k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
470  
220k  
Ω
Ω
0
Ω
1/16W J  
470k 1/16W J  
330  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
47k  
330  
Ω
Ω
0Ω  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
0
3-11  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
RA801  
RA802  
RA803  
RA804  
RA805  
RA806  
RA807  
RA808  
RA809  
RA810  
NRZ0065-331X  
NRZ0065-331X  
NRZ0065-331X  
NRZ0065-331X  
NRZ0065-102X  
NRZ0065-102X  
NRZ0065-331X  
NRZ0065-331X  
NRZ0065-331X  
NRZ0065-103X  
NET RESISTOR  
NET RESISTOR  
NET RESISTOR  
NET RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
NET RESISTOR  
NET RESISTOR  
NET RESISTOR  
NET RESISTOR  
330  
330  
330  
330  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
C505  
C506  
C507  
C508  
C509  
C510  
C511  
C512  
C513  
C514  
C551  
C571  
C572  
C573  
C574  
C575  
C576  
C577  
C578  
C581  
C582  
C583  
C584  
C585  
C586  
C587  
C588  
C589  
C590  
C591  
C592  
C593  
C594  
C595  
C596  
C597  
C598  
C601  
C602  
C603  
C604  
C605  
C606  
C607  
C608  
C609  
C610  
C611  
C612  
C613  
C614  
C616  
C621  
C622  
C623  
C624  
C625  
C626  
C627  
C628  
C629  
C630  
C631  
C632  
C633  
C634  
C635  
C636  
C637  
C638  
C639  
C640  
C641  
C642  
C643  
C644  
C645  
C646  
NDC31HJ-220X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NEAD0JM-107X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCS31HJ-102X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NDC31HJ-270X  
NDC31HJ-270X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NCS31HJ-821X  
NCS31HJ-821X  
NEAD1VM-475X  
NEAD1VM-475X  
NDC31HJ-121X  
NDC31HJ-121X  
NEAD1VM-475X  
NEAD1VM-475X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NEAD1CM-476X  
NCS31HJ-102X  
NCB31CK-473X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NCS31HJ-102X  
NCS31HJ-102X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NEAD0JM-107X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-682X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NDC31HJ-5R0X  
NDC31HJ-680X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NBE20JM-106X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NDC31HJ-470X  
NCB31HK-153X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-272X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NCB31EK-333X  
NCB31EK-333X  
NDC31HJ-471X  
NDC31HJ-471X  
NCB31CK-473X  
NCB31CK-473X  
NCB31CK-473X  
NCB31CK-473X  
NCB31CK-473X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31AK-334X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NCB31HK-103X  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
22pF 50V J  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
100uF 6.3V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
1000pF 50V J  
0.01uF 50V K  
27pF 50V J  
1k  
1k  
330  
330  
330  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
10k  
Ω
L801  
NQL114K-470X  
INDUCITOR  
47uH K  
27pF 50V J  
CN801  
CN802  
JS801  
S600  
S601  
S602  
S603  
S604  
S605  
S606  
S607  
S608  
S609  
S610  
S611  
S612  
S613  
S614  
S615  
S616  
S617  
S618  
TH801  
X801  
NNZ0098-001X  
QGF0523F1-40W  
QSW0976-001  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NSW0124-001X  
NAD0028-103X  
NAX0652-001X  
CAR CONNECTOR  
CONNECTOR  
ROTARY ENCODER  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
0.1uF 16V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
47uF 6.3V M  
0.1uF 16V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
100pF 50V J  
100pF 50V J  
820pF 50V J  
820pF 50V J  
4.7uF 35V M  
4.7uF 35V M  
120pF 50V J  
120pF 50V J  
4.7uF 35V M  
4.7uF 35V M  
47uF 6.3V M  
47uF 6.3V M  
47uF 16V M  
1000pF 50V J  
0.047uF 16V K  
100pF 50V J  
1000pF 50V J  
1000pF 50V J  
47uF 6.3V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
100uF 6.3V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
6800pF 50V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
5pF 50V J  
FFC/FPC (1-40)  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
TACT SW  
N THERMISTOR  
RESONATOR  
10kΩ  
Micon control board  
Block No. [0][3][0][0]  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
IC501  
IC502  
IC503  
IC504  
IC571  
IC572  
IC573  
IC601  
IC621  
IC651  
IC652  
IC681  
TMP91CW12AF5GJ4 IC  
BR24L01AFV-W-X IC  
SN74AHCT126PW-X IC(DIGITAL)  
NJU7241F33-X  
PCM1748KE-X  
NJM4565V-X  
SN74AHCU04PW-X  
TA2157FN-X  
TC94A14FA  
68pF 50V J  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
10uF 6.3V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
47pF 50V J  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
RF AMP IC  
CD LSI IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
0.015uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
2700pF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
0.033uF 25V K  
0.033uF 25V K  
470pF 50V J  
470pF 50V J  
0.047uF 16V K  
0.047uF 16V K  
0.047uF 16V K  
0.047uF 16V K  
0.047uF 16V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
100pF 50V J  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.33uF 10V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
NJU7772F15-X  
TC94A34FG-002  
BA5830FP-X  
Q501  
Q502  
Q571  
Q572  
Q573  
Q574  
Q601  
Q651  
Q652  
Q681  
UN2111-X  
UN2211-X  
UN2111-X  
UN2211-X  
2SB624/4/-X  
UN2211-X  
2SB1132/QR/-W  
2SB624/4/-X  
UN2211-X  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
TRANSISTOR  
2SB1184/QR/-X  
D506  
D682  
MA111-X  
1SR154-400-X  
SI DIODE  
DIODE  
C501  
C502  
C503  
C504  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NEAD0JM-107X  
NDC31HJ-220X  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
100uF 6.3V M  
22pF 50V J  
3-12  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
C651  
C652  
C653  
C654  
C655  
C656  
C659  
C660  
C661  
C662  
C663  
C664  
C665  
C666  
C667  
C668  
C669  
C682  
C683  
C684  
C689  
C690  
C693  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NBE20JM-106X  
NCB31HK-222X  
NCB31EK-104X  
NDC31HJ-101X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NEAD0JM-476X  
NCB31HK-103X  
NEAD1VM-475X  
NCB31CK-104X  
NEAD1CM-476X  
NEAD1CM-476X  
NBE20JM-106X  
NEAD1CM-476X  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
C CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
TA E CAPACITOR  
E CAPACITOR  
47uF 6.3V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
0.1uF 16V K  
0.01uF 50V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
0.1uF 16V K  
100pF 50V J  
0.01uF 50V K  
100pF 50V J  
10uF 6.3V M  
2200pF 50V K  
0.1uF 25V K  
100pF 50V J  
0.01uF 50V K  
47uF 6.3V M  
0.01uF 50V K  
4.7uF 35V M  
0.1uF 16V K  
47uF 16V M  
47uF 16V M  
10uF 6.3V M  
47uF 16V M  
R559  
R560  
R561  
R562  
R563  
R568  
R569  
R570  
R572  
R573  
R574  
R575  
R576  
R577  
R578  
R579  
R581  
R582  
R583  
R584  
R585  
R586  
R587  
R588  
R589  
R590  
R591  
R592  
R593  
R601  
R602  
R603  
R604  
R605  
R606  
R607  
R608  
R609  
R610  
R611  
R612  
R613  
R614  
R615  
R616  
R621  
R622  
R623  
R624  
R625  
R626  
R627  
R628  
R629  
R630  
R631  
R632  
R633  
R634  
R635  
R636  
R637  
R638  
R639  
R640  
R641  
R642  
R651  
R654  
R655  
R656  
R657  
R668  
R675  
R681  
R682  
R683  
R684  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-392X  
NRSA63J-682X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-225X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-470X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-203X  
NRSA63J-203X  
NRSA63J-123X  
NRSA63J-123X  
NRSA63J-303X  
NRSA63J-303X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-4R7X  
NRSA63J-823X  
NRSA63J-823X  
NRSA63J-334X  
NRSA63J-334X  
NRSA63J-220X  
NRSA63J-220X  
NRSA63J-823X  
NRSA63J-821X  
NRSA63J-563X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-202X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-153X  
NRSA63J-151X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-470X  
NRSA63J-470X  
NRSA63J-470X  
NRSA63J-562X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-474X  
NRSA63J-153X  
NRSA63J-155X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-105X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-470X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-470X  
NRSA63J-221X  
NRSA63J-682X  
NRSA63J-222X  
NRSA63J-682X  
NRSA63J-822X  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
0
Ω
1/16W J  
100 1/16W J  
100k  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
3.9k  
6.8k  
1k  
1k  
1k  
2.2M  
1k  
47  
1k  
1k  
100  
47k  
2.2k  
20k  
20k  
12k  
12k  
30k  
30k  
47k  
47k  
10k  
10k  
10k  
10k  
4.7  
82k  
82k  
330k  
330k  
22  
22  
82k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
R501  
R502  
R503  
R504  
R505  
R506  
R507  
R508  
R509  
R510  
R511  
R512  
R513  
R514  
R515  
R516  
R517  
R518  
R519  
R520  
R521  
R522  
R523  
R525  
R526  
R528  
R530  
R531  
R532  
R533  
R534  
R535  
R536  
R537  
R539  
R540  
R541  
R542  
R543  
R544  
R545  
R546  
R547  
R548  
R549  
R550  
R551  
R552  
R553  
R554  
R555  
R556  
R557  
R558  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-102X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-473X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-103X  
NRSA63J-271X  
NRSA63J-271X  
NRSA63J-822X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-472X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-183X  
NRSA63J-333X  
NRSA63J-101X  
NRSA63J-0R0X  
NRSA63J-104X  
NRSA63J-104X  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
1k  
1k  
1k  
100  
100  
47k  
47k  
47k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
100  
1k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1k  
47k  
Ω
820  
Ω
Ω
Ω
56k  
100  
10k  
2k  
1k  
15k  
150  
10k  
47  
47  
47  
5.6k  
47kΩ  
470k  
Ω
47k  
Ω
1kΩ  
1/16W J  
Ω
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
100k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
47k  
47k  
47k  
47k  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
15k  
1.5M  
10k  
100  
Ω
1kΩ  
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
100  
0
0
0
Ω
Ω
Ω
47k  
47k  
100  
10k  
100  
100  
10k  
270  
Ω
Ω
100  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
100  
1MΩ  
4.7k  
4.7k  
4.7k  
4.7k  
10k  
100k  
47 1/16W J  
10k  
47k  
2.2k  
47  
220  
6.8k  
2.2k  
6.8k  
8.2k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
270  
Ω
Ω
8.2k  
4.7k  
4.7k  
100k  
100k  
18k  
33k  
100  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
0
100k  
Ω
1/16W J  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
100kΩ  
3-13  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
R685  
R686  
R687  
R688  
R689  
R690  
R691  
NRSA63J-682X  
NRSA63J-123X  
NRSA63J-682X  
NRSA63J-182X  
NRSA63J-123X  
NRSA63J-333X  
NRSA63J-153X  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
MG RESISTOR  
6.8k  
Ω
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
1/16W J  
12k  
6.8k  
1.8k  
12k  
33k  
15k  
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
L501  
L502  
L571  
L572  
L621  
L622  
L623  
L651  
L652  
L653  
NQL114K-470X  
NQL114K-470X  
NQL114K-470X  
NQL114K-470X  
NQL114K-470X  
NQL114K-470X  
NQL114K-470X  
NQL114K-470X  
NQL114K-470X  
NQL114K-470X  
INDUCITOR  
INDUCITOR  
INDUCITOR  
INDUCITOR  
INDUCITOR  
INDUCITOR  
INDUCITOR  
INDUCITOR  
INDUCITOR  
INDUCITOR  
47uH K  
47uH K  
47uH K  
47uH K  
47uH K  
47uH K  
47uH K  
47uH K  
47uH K  
47uH K  
CN501  
CN601  
TH501  
X501  
QGB2027L1-22X  
QGF0527F2-22W  
NAD0028-103X  
NAX0385-001X  
NAX0375-001X  
CONNECTOR  
CONNECTOR  
N THERMISTOR  
CRYSTAL  
B-B (1-22)  
FFC/FPC (1-22)  
10k  
24.576MHz  
Ω
X571  
CRYSTAL  
16.9344MHz  
3-14  
<MEMO>  
3-15  
Packing materials and accessories parts list  
3
M
M
M
Block No.  
P1  
A1  
P7  
P6  
P5  
A18  
P7  
A19  
P1  
A2  
P1  
A3, A4, A5, A6, A7,  
A8, A9, A10, A11  
A22  
P4  
P2  
KIT:  
A12, A13, A14,  
A15, A16  
A20  
A21  
P3  
A17  
3-16  
Packing and Accessories  
Block No. [M][3][M][M]  
Symbol No.  
Part No.  
Part Name  
Description  
Local  
ENG GER FRE  
DUT  
A 1  
A 2  
GET0203-001A  
GET0203-002A  
INST BOOK  
INST BOOK  
LH401  
E
SPA ITA POL RUS  
SWE DAN FIN  
GRE  
LH401  
A 2  
A 3  
A 4  
GET0203-003A  
GET0203-005A  
GET0203-006A  
INST BOOK  
EX  
INSTALL MANUAL  
INSTALL MANUAL  
LH401  
E
LH401  
A 4  
A 5  
A 5  
GET0203-007A  
GET0165-001A  
GET0165-002A  
INSTALL MANUAL  
EX  
LH401  
E
LH401  
EX  
DEMO MODE SHEET  
DEMO MODE SHEET  
A 6  
A 7  
A 8  
A 9  
A 10  
A 11  
A 12  
A 13  
A 14  
A 15  
A 16  
A 17  
A 18  
A 19  
A 20  
A 21  
A 22  
KIT  
LVT1120-002A  
VND3046-001  
BT-54013-7  
LVT1121-001A  
QAM0553-002  
GET0213-001A  
VKZ4027-202  
VKH4871-001SS  
VKZ4328-001  
WNS5000Z  
GE40130-002A  
FSJB3002-00C  
GE20137-003A  
GE20164-001A  
RM-RK60  
MP3 GUIDE  
SERIAL TICKET  
WARRANTY CARD  
IMAGE CONV.SHEE  
CD-ROM  
CAUTION SHEET  
PLUG NUT  
MOUNT BOLT  
LOCK NUT  
WASHER  
HOOK  
(x2)  
HARD CASE  
MOUNTING SLEEVE  
TRIM PLATE  
REMOCON UNIT  
BATTERY  
------------  
QAM0176-002  
SRW-200J  
POWER CORD  
SCREW PARTS KIT A12 to A16  
P 1  
P 2  
P 3  
P 4  
P 5  
P 6  
P 7  
FSPG4002-001  
QPA00801205  
FSYH4036-068  
QPA01003003  
QPC03004315P  
GE31170-002A  
GE10086-003A  
POLY BAG  
POLY BAG  
SHEET  
POLY BAG  
POLY BAG  
INNER CTN  
EPS CUSHION  
(x3)  
8cm x 12cm  
10cm x 30cm  
30cm x 43cm  
(x2)  
3-17  
CD RECEIVER  
CD-RECEIVER  
RECEPTEUR CD  
CD-RECEIVER  
KD-LH401  
• This unit is equipped with the display demonstration. To cancel it, see page 8.  
• Dieses Gerät ist mit einer Demonstrationsfunktion für das Display ausgestattet. Auf Seite 8 wird  
beschrieben, wie Sie diese Demonstrationsfunktion deaktivieren können.  
• Cet appareil est équipé d’une fonction de démonstration des affichages. Pour l’annuler, référez-  
vous à la page 8.  
• Dit toestel heeft een display-demonstratiefunctie. Zie bladzijde 8 voor het annuleren van deze  
functie.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
Bijzonderheden over de installatie en aansluiting van het apparaat vindt u in de desbetreffende  
handleiding.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING  
GET0203-001A  
[E/EX]  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all  
servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid  
direct exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Caution:  
If the temperature inside the car is below 0˚ C, the movement of animation and text scroll will be halted on  
the display to prevent the display from being blurred.  
(LOW TEMP.) indicator appears on the display.  
When the temperature increases, the operating temperature is resumed, and these functions will start  
working again.  
CAUTION on Volume Setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. If the volume level is adjusted for the tuner, for  
example, the speakers may be damaged by the sudden increase in the output level. Therefore, lower the  
volume before playing a disc and adjust it as required during playback.  
Note:  
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on  
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.  
How to reset your unit  
Press the reset button on  
the control panel using a  
ball-point pen or a similar  
tool.  
CAUTION:  
NEVER insert your finger in  
between the control panel and  
the unit, as it may get caught or  
hurt.  
This will reset the built-in  
microcomputer.  
(See page 54.)  
Note:  
Your preset adjustments—such as preset channels or sound  
adjustments—will also be erased.  
2
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product. Please read all instructions carefully before operation,  
to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
CONTENTS  
How to reset your unit ...............................  
2
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS ....................... 37  
Downloading images and animations ....... 38  
Deleting unwanted files ............................. 41  
Activating the downloaded images and  
LOCATION OF THE BUTTONS ............  
Control panel.............................................  
Illumination Navigation for easy  
4
4
animations .............................................. 43  
operations...............................................  
Remote controller......................................  
Preparing the remote controller ................  
4
5
6
OTHER MAIN FUNCTIONS ................ 45  
Changing the general settings (PSM) ....... 45  
Selecting the dimmer mode ...................... 50  
Changing the display color ........................ 51  
Assigning names to the sources ............... 53  
Changing the control panel angle ............. 54  
Detaching the control panel ...................... 55  
BASIC OPERATIONS .......................  
Turning on the power ................................  
Canceling the display demonstration ........  
Setting the clock........................................  
7
7
8
9
RADIO OPERATIONS ...................... 10  
Listening to the radio................................. 10  
Storing stations in memory ....................... 12  
Tuning in to a preset station ...................... 14  
Changing the display pattern .................... 15  
CD CHANGER OPERATIONS .............. 56  
Playing discs ............................................. 56  
Selecting a disc/folder/track using the  
name lists ............................................... 59  
Selecting the playback modes .................. 60  
RDS OPERATIONS ......................... 16  
What you can do with RDS ....................... 16  
Other convenient RDS functions and  
EXTERNAL COMPONENT OPERATIONS... 62  
Playing an external component................. 62  
Changing the display pattern .................... 62  
adjustments ............................................ 21  
DAB TUNER OPERATIONS ................ 63  
Tuning in to an ensemble and one of the  
DISC OPERATIONS ........................ 23  
About MP3 and WMA discs ...................... 23  
Playing a disc ............................................ 23  
Locating a track or a particular portion  
services .................................................. 63  
Storing DAB services in memory .............. 65  
Tuning in to a preset DAB service ............. 66  
What you can do more with DAB .............. 67  
Changing the display pattern .................... 70  
on a disc ................................................. 26  
Selecting a folder and a track using the  
name lists ............................................... 28  
Selecting the playback modes .................. 29  
Prohibiting disc ejection ............................ 30  
Changing the display pattern .................... 31  
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................... 71  
MAINTENANCE ............................. 74  
Handling discs........................................... 74  
SOUND ADJUSTMENTS ................... 32  
Adjusting the sound .................................. 32  
Selecting preset sound modes  
SPECIFICATIONS ........................... 75  
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer) ...................... 33  
Storing your own sound modes ................ 35  
Selecting the display theme ...................... 36  
BEFORE USE  
*For safety....  
*Temperature inside the car....  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the  
car becomes normal before operating the unit.  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
3
LOCATION OF THE BUTTONS  
Control panel  
1 2  
3
4
5 6 7 8  
9
p
q
w e r t y  
1 Control dial  
8 4  
/¢  
buttons  
2
(standby/on attenuator) button  
9 SEL (select) button  
p D DISP (display) button  
q Number buttons  
3 TP/PTY (traffic programme/programme type)  
button  
4 Display window  
w M MODE button  
5 5 (up) button  
e Remote sensor  
6 FM/AM DAB button  
7 0 (eject) button  
(angle) button  
r ∞ (down) button  
t CD/CD-CH (CD changer) button  
y
(control panel release) button  
Illumination Navigation for easy operations  
If you use M MODE or SEL (select), the display and some controls (such as the number buttons,  
/¢ , 5/∞, and control dial) enter the corresponding control mode, then the controls  
4
start flashing to lead you to the next operational steps. (Illumination Navigation)  
• The display shows how these buttons function during this period.  
Ex.: When you press number button 1 after pressing M MODE, to operate the FM tuner.  
Time countdown indicator  
To use these controls for original functions again, wait until the controls stop flashing without  
using these controls.  
• Pressing M MODE again also restores original functions. However, pressing SEL (select) makes  
the unit enters a different mode.  
4
3 • Selects the preset stations (or service) while  
listening to the radio (or the DAB tuner).  
Each time you press the button, the preset  
station (or service) number increases, and  
the selected station (or service) is tuned in.  
• Skips to the first track of the previous folder  
while listening to an MP3 disc or a WMA  
disc.  
Remote controller  
Each time you press the button, you can  
move to the previous folder and start playing  
the first track.  
• While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3-  
compatible CD changer;  
– Skips to the previous disc if pressed  
briefly.  
S
– Skips to the previous folder if pressed and  
held.  
Note: While playing a CD on a CD changer, this  
always skips to the previous disc.  
4 Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
Each time you press the button, the sound  
mode (iEQ) changes.  
1 • Turns on the unit if pressed when the unit is  
turned off.  
5 • Selects the band while listening to the radio  
(or the DAB tuner).  
• Turns off the unit if pressed and held for a  
few seconds.  
Each time you press the button, the band  
changes.  
• Drops the volume level in a moment if  
pressed briefly.  
Press again to resume the volume.  
• Skips to the first track of the next folder  
while listening to an MP3 disc or a WMA  
disc.  
Each time you press the button, you can  
move to the next folder and start playing the  
first track.  
2 • Searches for stations while listening to the  
radio.  
• Selects services while listening to the DAB  
tuner if pressed briefly.  
• While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3-  
compatible CD changer;  
• Searches for ensembles while listening to  
the DAB tuner if pressed for more than one  
second.  
– Skips to the next disc if pressed briefly.  
– Skips to the next folder if pressed and  
held.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if  
pressed and held while listening to a disc.  
• Skips to the beginning of the next track or  
goes back to the beginning of the current (or  
previous) tracks if pressed briefly while  
listening to a disc.  
Note: While playing a CD on a CD changer, this  
always skips to the next disc.  
6 Selects the source.  
Each time you press the button, the source  
changes.  
7 Functions the same as the control dial on the  
main unit.  
Note: These buttons do not function for the  
preferred setting mode (PSM) adjustment.  
5
3. Return the battery holder.  
Preparing the remote controller  
Insert again the battery holder by pushing it  
until you hear a clicking sound.  
Before using the remote controller:  
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the main unit. Make sure there is no  
obstacle in between.  
(back side)  
WARNING:  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach.  
If a child accidentally swallows the battery,  
consult a doctor immediately.  
Remote sensor  
• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, or heat the  
battery or dispose of it in a fire.  
Doing any of these things may cause the battery  
to give off heat, crack, or start a fire.  
• Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
• Do not expose the remote sensor to strong  
light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Installing the battery  
When the controllable range or effectiveness of  
the remote controller decreases, replace the  
battery.  
Doing this may cause the battery to give off  
heat, crack, or start a fire.  
• When throwing away or saving the battery,  
wrap it in tape and insulate; otherwise, the  
battery may start to give off heat, crack, or start  
a fire.  
• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
1. Remove the battery holder.  
1) Push out the battery holder in the direction  
indicated by the arrow using a ball-point  
pen or a similar tool.  
2) Remove the battery holder.  
Doing this may cause the battery to give off  
heat, crack, or start a fire.  
(back side)  
CAUTION:  
DO NOT leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for  
a long time. Otherwise, it may be damaged.  
2. Place the battery.  
KD-LH401 is equipped with the steering  
wheel remote control function.  
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote controller, you can operate this  
receiver using the controller.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual  
(separate volume) for connection to utilize  
this function.  
Slide the battery into the holder with the +  
side facing upwards so that the battery is  
fixed in the holder.  
Lithium coin battery  
(product number:  
CR2025)  
6
BASIC OPERATIONS  
Turning on the power  
3 Adjust the volume.  
To increase the volume  
1 Turn on the power.  
To decrease the volume  
Volume level appears.  
Note on One-Touch Operation:  
When you select a source in step 2 below, the  
power automatically comes on. You do not have  
to press this button to turn on the power.  
2 Select the source.  
Current sound mode (iEQ)  
(see page 33)  
• To operate the FM/AM tuner, press  
FM/AM DAB.  
To operate the DAB tuner, press and  
hold FM/AM DAB.  
4 Adjust the sound as you want.  
(See pages 32 – 35.)  
Note:  
* Without connecting the DAB tuner, you  
While playing a source, you can select the display  
theme of your preference. For details, see “Selecting  
the display theme” on page 36.  
cannot select “DAB” as the source.  
• To operate the CD player (CD),  
CD changer (CD-CH), or external  
component (LINE IN), press CD/CD-CH  
repeatedly.  
NOTICE:  
The illustrations of the display used in this manual  
are mainly of the initial setting when shipped from  
the factory. If you have changed the display  
patterns or some PSM items, the actual displays  
you see will be different.  
*1 Without loading the CD, you cannot select  
“CD” as the source.  
*2 Without connecting the CD changer, you  
cannot select “CD-CH” as the source.  
*3 To select “LINE IN” as the source, select  
“Line In” for the “Ext Input” setting on  
page 49.  
7
To drop the volume in a moment  
2 Press number button 1 to select  
“MOVIE”—Movie category of the  
PSM settings.  
Press  
briefly while listening to any  
source. “ATT” starts flashing on the display, and  
the volume level will drop in a moment.  
To resume the previous volume level, press the  
button briefly again.  
The “Graphics” setting screen appears on  
the display.  
• If you turn the control dial, you can also restore  
the sound.  
To turn off the power  
Press and hold  
for more than one  
second.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start from where playback  
has been stopped previously, next time you  
turn on the power.  
3 Select “Off.”  
Canceling the display  
demonstration  
When shipped from the factory, display  
demonstration has been activated, and starts  
automatically when no operations are done for  
about 20 seconds.  
• It is recommended to cancel the display  
demonstration before you use the unit for the  
first time.  
4 Finish the setting.  
To cancel the display demonstration, follow  
the procedure below:  
To activate the display demonstration, repeat  
the same procedure and select “Int Demo” or “All  
Demo” in step 3.  
• For more details, see “To show the graphics on  
the display—Graphics” on page 48.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)  
The next-step-operation  
buttons start flashing.  
8
Setting the clock  
5 Set the clock system.  
1 Select “24H/12H.”  
You can also set the clock system to either  
24 hours or 12 hours.  
2 Select “24Hours” or “12Hours.”  
1
2
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)  
The next-step-operation  
buttons start flashing.  
6 Finish the setting.  
2 Press number button 2 to select  
“CLOCK”—Clock category of the  
PSM settings.  
To check the clock time when the unit is  
turned off, press D DISP.  
The “Clock Hr” (hour) setting screen  
appears on the display.  
The power turns on and the clock time is shown  
for about 5 seconds, then the power turns off.  
3 Adjust the hour.  
4 Set the minute.  
1 Select “Clock Min” (minute).  
2 Adjust the minute.  
1
2
9
RADIO OPERATIONS  
Listening to the radio  
2 Start searching for a station.  
To search for stations of  
higher frequencies  
You can use either automatic searching or manual  
searching to tune in to a particular station.  
Searching for a station automatically:  
Auto search  
To search for stations of lower frequencies  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
1 Select the band (FM1 – 3, AM).  
Each time you press the  
button, the band changes as  
follows:  
To stop searching before a station is received,  
press the same button you have pressed for  
searching.  
Selected band appears.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Note:  
This receiver has three FM bands (FM1, FM2,  
FM3). You can use any one of them to listen to  
an FM broadcast.  
10  
Searching for a station manually:  
Manual search  
If the sound quality decreases and the  
stereo effect is lost while listening to an  
FM station  
In some areas, adjacent stations may  
interfere with each other. If this interference  
occurs, this unit can automatically reduce this  
interference noise (the initial setting when  
shipped from the factory). However, in this  
case, the sound quality will be degraded and  
the stereo effect will also be lost.  
1 Select the band (FM1 – 3, AM).  
Each time you press the  
button, the band changes as  
follows:  
If you do not want to degrade the sound  
quality and to lose the stereo effect, rather  
than to eliminate the interference noise, see  
“To change the FM tuner selectivity—IF Filter”  
on page 49.  
Note:  
This receiver has three FM bands (FM1, FM2,  
FM3). You can use any one of them to listen to  
an FM broadcast.  
2 Press and hold ¢  
or 4  
until “Manual Search” starts flashing  
on the display.  
3 Tune in to a station you want while  
“Manual Search” is flashing.  
To tune in to stations of  
higher frequencies  
To tune in to stations of lower frequencies  
• If you release your finger from the button,  
the manual mode automatically turns off  
after about 5 seconds.  
• If you hold down the button, the frequency  
keeps changing (in 50 kHz intervals for  
FM and 9 kHz for AM—MW/LW) until you  
release the button.  
11  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive:  
Storing stations in memory  
You can use one of the following two methods to  
store broadcasting stations in memory.  
• Automatic preset of FM stations: SSM (Strong-  
station Sequential Memory)  
Set the FM reception mode to “Mono On.”  
1 Press M MODE while listening to an FM  
stereo broadcast.  
• Manual preset of both FM and AM stations  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
FM station automatic preset: SSM  
You can preset 6 local FM stations in each FM  
band (FM1, FM2, and FM3).  
2 Press number button 1 to select “Mono On”  
while “Mode” is still on the display.  
Each time you press the button, “Mono On” or  
“Mono Off” appears alternately.  
1 Select the FM band (FM1 – 3) you  
want to store FM stations into.  
Each time you press the  
button, the band changes as  
follows:  
2 Start automatic preset.  
1 Press M MODE.  
After about  
5 seconds  
“Mode” appears on the  
display.  
The next-step-operation  
buttons start flashing.  
The display returns to the source indication  
screen.  
2 Press and hold number button 5 while  
“Mode” is still on the display.  
MONO indicator appears.  
The sound you hear becomes monaural but the  
reception will be improved.  
“SSM” appears, then disappears  
when automatic preset is over.  
12  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the band  
number you have selected (FM1, FM2, or FM3).  
These stations are preset in the number buttons  
—No.1 (lowest frequency) to No.6 (highest  
frequency).  
3 Press and hold the number button  
(in this example, 1) for more than  
2 seconds.  
When automatic preset is over, the station stored  
in number button 1 will be automatically tuned in.  
The display pattern automatically changes  
to the small animation display (see page  
15).  
Manual preset  
You can preset up to 6 stations in each band  
(FM1, FM2, FM3, and AM) manually.  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into the  
preset number 1 of the FM1 band.  
1 Select the band (FM1 – 3, AM) you  
want to store stations into (in this  
example, FM1).  
After about  
5 seconds  
Each time you press the  
button, the band changes as  
follows:  
Preset number appears.  
2 Tune in to a station (in this example,  
of 92.5 MHz).  
4 Repeat the above procedure to store  
other stations into other preset  
numbers.  
To tune in to stations of  
higher frequencies  
Notes:  
• A previously preset station is erased when a new  
station is stored in the same preset number.  
• Preset stations are erased when the power supply to  
the memory circuit is interrupted (for example,  
during battery replacement). If this occurs, preset  
the stations again.  
To tune in to stations of lower frequencies  
13  
Selecting a preset station using the  
preset station list  
If you forget what stations are stored in which  
preset numbers, you can check the preset station  
list, then select your desired station.  
Tuning in to a preset station  
You can easily tune in to a preset station.  
Remember that you must store stations first. If  
you have not stored them yet, see “Storing  
stations in memory” on pages 12 and 13.  
1 Select the band (FM1 – 3, AM).  
Selecting a preset station directly  
Each time you press the  
button, the band changes as  
follows:  
1 Select the band (FM1 – 3, AM).  
Each time you press the  
button, the band changes as  
follows:  
2 Press and hold 5 (up) or ∞ (down)  
until the preset station list for the  
current band (FM1, FM2, FM3, or AM)  
appears on the display.  
2 Select the number (1 – 6) for the  
preset station you want.  
The current station will be  
highlighted on the display.  
Ex.: When you select the preset station  
number 1 of the FM1 band  
Notes:  
• You can show the other FM band preset  
station lists (FM1, FM2, or FM3) by pressing  
5 (up) or ∞ (down).  
• If a preset station is an FM RDS station with  
PS (programme station) signal, PS name will  
be shown instead of the station frequency.  
3 Select the number (1 – 6) for the  
preset station you want.  
14  
Changing the display pattern  
By pressing D DISP, you can change the information shown on the display.  
Each time you press the button, the display patterns change as follows:  
• When receiving an AM or non FM RDS-  
station  
• When receiving an FM RDS-station  
(see the following pages)  
Large animation display  
Large animation display  
Current sound mode  
(iEQ) (see page 33)  
Appears only when  
selecting a preset  
station.  
Current sound mode  
(iEQ) (see page 33)  
PS name  
Small animation display 1  
Small animation display 1  
Clock time  
Clock time  
Small animation display 2*  
Small animation display 2  
* Only for non FM RDS-station  
PTY code appears.  
Clock time display  
Clock time display  
15  
RDS OPERATIONS  
To use Network-Tracking Reception  
You can select the different modes of network-  
tracking reception to continue listening to the  
same programme in its finest reception.  
What you can do with RDS  
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to  
send an additional signal along with their regular  
programme signals. For example, the stations  
send their station names, as well as information  
about what type of programme they broadcast,  
such as sports or music, etc.  
Another advantage of RDS function is called  
“Enhanced Other Networks.” By using the  
Enhanced Other Networks data sent from a  
station, you can tune in to a different station of a  
different network broadcasting your favorite  
programme or traffic announcement while  
listening to another programme or to another  
source such as CD.  
When shipped from the factory, “AF” is selected.  
• AF:  
Network-Tracking Reception is  
activated without Regionalization.  
With this setting, the unit switches to  
another station within the same  
network when the receiving signals  
from the current station become  
weak. (In this mode, the programme  
may differ from the one currently  
received.)  
The AF indicator lights up.  
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
(Network-Tracking Reception)  
• TA Standby Reception or your favorite  
programme  
• AF Reg: Network-Tracking Reception is  
activated with Regionalization.  
With this setting, the unit switches to  
another station, within the same  
network, broadcasting the same  
programme when the receiving  
signals from the current station  
become weak.  
• PTY (Programme Type) search  
• Programme search  
• And some other functions  
The REG indicator lights up.  
• Off*:  
Network-Tracking Reception is  
deactivated.  
Neither the AF nor the REG indicator  
lights up.  
Tracing the same programme  
automatically (Network-Tracking  
Reception)  
* You can select only when “DAB AF”  
is set to “Off.” (See page 47 for  
details.)  
When driving in an area where FM reception is  
not good, the tuner built in this unit automatically  
tunes in to another RDS station, broadcasting the  
same programme with stronger signals. So, you  
can continue to listen to the same programme in  
its finest reception, no matter where you drive.  
(See the illustration on page 22.)  
Two types of the RDS data are used to make  
Network-Tracking Reception work correctly  
—PI (Programme Identification) and AF  
(Alternative Frequency).  
Without receiving these data correctly from the  
RDS station you are listening to, Network-  
Tracking Reception will not operate.  
AF or REG indicator lights up.  
Note:  
If a DAB tuner is connected and Alternative Reception  
(for DAB services) is activated, Network-Tracking  
Reception is also activated (“AF”) automatically. On  
the other hand, Network-Tracking Reception cannot  
be deactivated without deactivating Alternative  
Reception. (See page 69.)  
16  
Using TA Standby Reception  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to the Traffic Announcement (TA)  
from the current source (another FM station, CD,  
or other connected components).  
• See also “Road Traffic News Standby Reception  
(TA Standby Reception)” on page 67.  
Press TP/PTY to activate TA  
Standby Reception.  
Each time your press the button,  
this function is turned on and off  
alternately.  
2 Press number button 4 to select  
“TUNER”—Tuner category of the  
PSM settings.  
The “PTY Stnby” (standby) setting screen  
appears on the display.  
TP indicator appears.  
(either lights up or flashes)  
Note:  
TA Standby Reception will not work if you are  
listening to an AM station.  
3 Select “AF-Regn’l” (alternative  
frequency/regionalization  
reception).  
7 When the current source is FM, the TP  
indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby  
Reception is activated.  
If a station starts broadcasting a traffic  
announcement, “Traffic News” appears on  
the display, and this unit automatically tunes  
in to the station. The volume changes to the  
preset TA volume level (see page 21) and the  
traffic announcement can be heard.  
4 Select the desired mode—“AF,”  
“AF Reg,”or “Off.”  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby  
Reception is not yet activated since the  
station being received does not provide the  
signals used for TA Standby Reception.  
To activate TA Standby Reception, you need  
to tune in to another station providing these  
5 Finish the setting.  
signals. Press ¢  
or 4  
to search  
for such a station.  
When a station providing these signals is  
tuned in, the TP indicator stops flashing and  
remains lit. Now TA Standby Reception is  
activated.  
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE  
17  
7 When the current source is other than FM,  
the TP indicator lights up.  
If a station starts broadcasting a traffic  
announcement, “Traffic News” appears on the  
display, and this unit automatically changes the  
source and tunes in to the station.  
3 Select one of the twenty-nine PTY  
codes. (See page 22.)  
Selected code name  
appears on the display and  
is stored into memory.  
Using PTY Standby Reception  
4 Finish the setting.  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite programme (PTY:  
Programme Type) from any source except AM  
stations.  
• See also “Using PTY Standby Reception” on  
page 69.  
To set PTY Standby Reception  
If a DAB tuner is connected, the following  
operations will set PTY Standby Reception for  
both the FM tuner and DAB tuner. (See page 69.)  
To select your favorite PTY code for PTY  
Standby Reception  
When shipped from factory, PTY Standby  
Reception has been set to search for “News”  
programmes.  
You can select your favorite programme type for  
PTY Standby Reception.  
1 Press M MODE while listening to an FM  
broadcast.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)  
2 Press number button 3 to activate PTY  
Standby Reception while “Mode” is still on the  
display.  
Each time you press the button, PTY Standby  
Reception turns on and off alternately.  
2 Press number button 4 to select  
“TUNER”—Tuner category of the  
PSM settings.  
The “PTY Stnby” (standby) setting screen  
appears on the display.  
Ex.: When the currently selected PTY code  
for PTY Standby Reception is “News”  
After about  
5 seconds  
The display returns to the source indication  
screen.  
PTY indicator appears.  
(either lights up or flashes)  
18  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby  
Reception is activated.  
If a station starts broadcasting the selected  
PTY programme, this unit automatically tunes  
in to the station.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby  
Reception is not yet activated since the station  
being received does not provide the signals  
used for PTY Standby Reception.  
Searching for your favorite programme  
You can search for any one of the PTY codes.  
In addition, you can store your 6 favorite  
programme types in the number buttons.  
When shipped from the factory, the following  
6 programme types have been stored in the  
number buttons (1 to 6).  
• See also “Searching for your favorite service”  
on page 69.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, you need  
to tune in to another station providing these  
To store your favorite programme types, see  
below and page 20.  
signals. Press ¢  
or 4  
to search for  
such a station.  
To search for your favorite programme type,  
see page 20.  
When a station providing these signals is tuned  
in, the PTY indicator stops flashing and  
remains lit. Now PTY Standby Reception is  
activated.  
Note:  
After turning on PTY Standby Reception, you can  
change the source without canceling PTY Standby  
Reception. If a station starts broadcasting the selected  
PTY programme, this unit automatically changes the  
source and tunes in to the station.  
To store your favorite programme types  
1 Press and hold TP/PTY for more  
than 2 seconds while listening to an  
FM station.  
• If you change the source to AM, PTY Standby  
Reception will be temporarily canceled.  
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
• You can only deactivate the PTY Standby Reception  
when the source is FM.  
Ex.: If you have selected “Pop M” previously  
2 Select one of the twenty-nine PTY  
codes. (See page 22.)  
Selected code name  
appears on the display.  
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE  
19  
3 Press and hold the number button  
for more than 2 seconds to store the  
PTY code selected into the preset  
number you want.  
Ex.: When “Rock M” is selected  
How to use the 5 (up) or ∞ (down) button  
By pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down) repeatedly,  
you can show the list of your preset PTY  
codes and all twenty-nine PTY codes (six  
PTY codes at a time). First, the list of your  
stored PTY codes appears, then all twenty-  
nine PTY codes (six PTY codes at a time)  
appears in sequence.  
Selected preset number flashes for a while.  
4 Press and holdTP/PTY for more than  
2 seconds to exit from this mode.  
Press the number button to select your  
desired PTY code on the list currently shown  
on the display.  
To search for your favorite programme  
type  
3 Start PTY search for your favorite  
programme.  
1 Press and hold TP/PTY for more  
than 2 seconds while listening to an  
FM station.  
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
• If there is a station broadcasting a programme  
of the same PTY code as you have selected,  
that station is tuned in.  
Ex.: If you have selected “Pop M” previously  
• If there is no station broadcasting a  
programme of the same PTY code as you have  
selected, the station will not change.  
2 To select one of your favorite  
programme type  
Note:  
In some areas, the PTY search will not work correctly.  
or  
To select any one of the twenty-nine  
PTY codes  
or  
20  
2 Press number button 4 to select “TUNER”—  
Other convenient RDS  
Tuner category of the PSM settings.  
functions and adjustments  
3 Press ¢  
or 4  
to select “TA Volume.”  
4 Turn the control dial to set to the desired  
volume.  
Automatic selection of the station  
when using the number buttons  
Usually when you press the number button, the  
preset station is tuned in.  
You can set it from “Volume 0” to “Volume 30”  
or “Volume 50” (depending on the amplifier  
gain control setting: see page 49).  
5 Press SEL (select) to finish the setting.  
However, when the preset station is an RDS  
station, something different will happen. If the  
signals from that preset station are not sufficient  
for good reception, this unit, using the AF data,  
tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the  
same programme as the original preset station is  
broadcasting. (Programme search)  
Automatic clock adjustment  
When shipped from the factory, the clock built in  
this unit is set to be readjusted automatically  
using the CT (Clock Time) data in the RDS  
signal.  
If you do not want to use automatic clock  
adjustment, follow the procedure below.  
• See also “Changing the general settings  
(PSM)” on page 45.  
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another  
station using programme search.  
To activate programme search, follow the  
procedure below.  
• See also “Changing the general settings  
(PSM)” on page 45.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more than  
2 seconds so that one of the PSM items  
appears on the display.  
2 Press number button 2 to select “CLOCK”—  
Clock category of the PSM settings.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more than  
2 seconds so that one of the PSM items  
appears on the display.  
2 Press number button 4 to select “TUNER”—  
Tuner category of the PSM settings.  
3 Press ¢  
(adjustment).  
or 4  
to select “Auto Adj”  
4 Turn the control dial counterclockwise to select  
“Off.”  
Now automatic clock adjustment is canceled.  
5 Press SEL (select) to finish the setting.  
3 Press ¢  
or 4  
“P(Programme)-Search.”  
to select  
4 Turn the control dial clockwise to select “On.”  
Now programme search is activated.  
5 Press SEL (select) to finish the setting.  
To reactivate clock adjustment, repeat the  
same procedure and select “On” in step 4 by  
turning the control dial clockwise.  
To cancel programme search, repeat the same  
procedure and select “Off” in step 4 by turning  
the control dial counterclockwise.  
Note:  
You must stay tuned to the same station for more than  
2 minutes after setting “Auto Adj” to “On.”  
Otherwise, the clock time will not be adjusted. (This is  
because the unit takes up to 2 minutes to capture the  
CT data in the RDS signal.)  
Setting the TA volume level  
You can preset the volume level for TA Standby  
Reception. When a traffic programme is received,  
the volume level automatically changes to the  
preset level.  
• See also “Changing the general settings  
(PSM)” on page 45.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more than  
2 seconds so that one of the PSM items  
appears on the display.  
21  
PTY codes  
News:  
News  
Social:  
Programmes on social activities  
Affairs:  
Topical programmes expanding on  
current news or affairs  
Programmes which impart advice  
on a wide variety of topics  
Sport events  
Religion: Programmes dealing with any  
aspect of belief or faith, or the  
nature of existence or ethics  
Phone In: Programmes where people can  
express their views either by  
Info:  
Sport:  
Educate: Educational programmes  
phone or in a public forum  
Drama:  
Culture:  
Radio plays  
Programmes on national or  
regional culture  
Travel:  
Programmes about travel  
destinations, package tours, and  
travel ideas and opportunities  
Programmes concerned with  
recreational activities such as  
gardening, cooking, fishing, etc.  
Jazz music  
Science: Programmes on natural science  
and technology  
Varied:  
Leisure:  
Other programmes like comedies  
or ceremonies  
Jazz:  
Pop M:  
Pop music  
Country:  
Country music  
Rock M:  
Easy M:  
Light M:  
Rock music  
Easy-listening music  
Light music  
Nation M: Current popular music from  
another nation or region, in that  
country’s language  
Classics: Classical music  
Other M: Other music  
Oldies:  
Folk M:  
Classic pop music  
Folk music  
Weather: Weather information  
Finance: Reports on commerce, trading, the  
Stock Market, etc.  
Document: Programmes dealing with factual  
matters, presented in an  
investigative style  
Children: Entertainment programmes for  
children  
The same programme can be received on different frequencies.  
Programme 1  
broadcasting on  
frequency A  
Programme 1  
broadcasting on  
frequency E  
Programme 1  
broadcasting on  
frequency B  
Programme 1  
broadcasting on  
frequency C  
Programme 1  
broadcasting on  
frequency D  
22  
DISC OPERATIONS  
This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs,  
CD-Rs (Recordable), CD-RWs (Rewritable), and  
CD Texts.  
• This unit is also compatible with MP3 and  
WMA discs. For details about these discs,  
refer to “A Guide to MP3/WMA” (separate  
volume).  
Playing a disc  
1 Open the control panel.  
About MP3 and WMA discs  
MP3 and WMA (Windows Media® Audio) “tracks”  
(the word “file” is not used to indicate MP3 or  
WMA files, “track” is used in this manual) are  
recorded in “folders.”  
During recording, the tracks and folders can be  
arranged in a way similar to arranging files and  
folders of computer data.  
“Root” is similar to the root of a tree. Every track  
and folder can be linked to and be accessed from  
the root.  
Note on One-Touch Operation:  
When a disc is already in the loading slot,  
pressing CD/CD-CH turns on the unit and starts  
playback automatically.  
2 Insert a disc into the loading slot.  
The unit draws the disc,  
the control panel goes  
back to the previous  
position (see page  
54), and playback  
starts automatically.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
stop playback.  
Note:  
For details on playable discs and other related  
information, see page 74.  
About mistracking:  
Mistracking may result from driving on extremely  
rough roads. This does not damage the unit and  
the disc, but will be annoying.  
: Folders and their playback order  
We recommend that you stop disc play while  
driving on such rough roads.  
: MP3/WMA tracks and their playback  
order  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
23  
Display indications when inserting an audio  
CD or a CD Text:  
Display indications when inserting an MP3  
or a WMA discs:  
Total track number and total  
Total folder and track numbers  
playing time of the inserted CD  
MP3 indicator*  
Current track and elapsed playing time  
Notes:  
• MP3 or WMA discs require a longer readout time.  
(It differs due to the complexity of the folder/track  
configuration.)  
• The unit cannot read or play an MP3 track  
without the extension code <.mp3>, and a WMA  
track without the extension code <.wma>.  
Current folder/track and elapsed playing time  
* WMA or MP3 indicator lights up depending on the  
first detected track.  
Notes:  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed for about  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again  
into the loading slot to protect it from dust.  
(Disc play will not start this time.)  
• You can eject the disc even when the unit is turned  
off.  
Press 0 (eject).  
Disc play stops and the control panel moves  
down. The disc automatically ejects from the  
loading slot. The source changes to the  
previously selected source.  
• If you change the source or turn the power off,  
disc play also stops (without ejecting the disc).  
Next time you select “CD” as the source or turn  
the power on, disc play starts from where  
playback has been stopped previously.  
To return the control panel to its previous  
position, press 0 (eject) again.  
• If you keep the loading slot fully open for about  
1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep”  
setting is turned “On”—see page 49) the  
control panel automatically returns to its  
previous position.  
Be careful not to get the disc or your finger  
caught in between the control panel and the  
unit.  
24  
What is ImageLink?  
To activate ImageLink, follow the procedure  
below:  
• See also “Changing the general settings  
(PSM)” on page 45.  
When an MP3 or a WMA folder includes an  
image <jml> file edited by Image Converter  
(supplied in the CD-ROM), you can show the  
image on the display while the tracks in the  
folder are played back.  
• While reading an image <jml> file, no  
sounds come out (“Image Link” is shown on  
the display during this period).  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more than  
2 seconds so that one of the PSM items  
appears on the display.  
2 Press number button 1 to select “MOVIE”—  
Movie category of the PSM settings.  
The “Graphics” setting screen appears on  
the display.  
3 Turn the control dial to select “ImageLink.”  
4 Press SEL (select) to finish the setting.  
ImageLink starts functioning when the next  
folder starts playing.  
Note:  
ImageLink will not work in the following cases:  
• If no <jml> file is included in an MP3/WMA  
folder.  
• If Intro Scan is activated.  
• If the source is changed to any other than “CD,” or  
• If you turn off then on the unit while “Image Link”  
is shown on the display.  
If there are more than one <jml> file in a  
folder, a <jml> file with younger playback  
order number will be shown on the display  
(in the above example, “Photo2.jml” will be  
used for Album 2).  
25  
To go to a track quickly  
1 Press M MODE while playing a disc.  
Locating a track or a  
particular portion on a disc  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
Press and hold ¢  
while playing a disc, to  
fast-forward the track.  
,
Press and hold 4  
, while playing a disc, to  
reverse the track.  
See page 38 for this function.  
2 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) while “Mode” is still  
Note:  
on the display.  
During this operation on an MP3 or a WMA disc, you  
can only hear intermittent sounds. (The elapsed  
playing time also changes intermittently on the  
display.)  
To skip 10 tracks* forwards  
to the last track  
To skip 10 tracks* backwards  
to the first track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
* First time you press 5 (up) or ∞ (down)  
button, the track skips to the nearest higher  
or lower track with a track number of multiple  
ten (ex. 10th, 20th, 30th).  
Then each time you press the button, you can  
skip 10 tracks (see “How to go to the desired  
track quickly” below).  
Press ¢  
briefly, while  
playing a disc, to go ahead  
to the beginning of the next  
track.  
Each time you press the  
button consecutively, the  
beginning of the next tracks  
is located and played back.  
• After the last track, the first track will be  
selected, and vice versa.  
Press 4  
briefly, while playing a disc, to go  
Note:  
back to the beginning of the current track.  
Each time you press the button consecutively,  
the beginning of the previous tracks is located  
and played back.  
If the current playing disc is an MP3 or a WMA disc,  
tracks are skipped within the same folder.  
How to go to the desired track quickly  
• Ex. 1: To select track number 32 while  
playing track number 6  
To go to a particular track directly  
(Only for CD and CD Text discs)  
Press the number button corresponding to the  
track number to start its playback.  
(Three times)  
(Twice)  
Track 6  
\ 10 \ 20 \ 30 \ 31 \ 32  
• Ex. 2 :To select track number 8 while  
playing track number 36  
• To select a track number from 01 – 06:  
Press 1 (7) – 6 (12) briefly.  
• To select a track number from 07 – 12:  
Press and hold 1 (7) – 6 (12) for more than one  
second.  
(Three times)  
\ 30 \ 20 \ 10 \ 9 \ 8  
(Twice)  
Track 36  
26  
To go to a particular folder directly  
(Only possible for MP3 or WMA disc)  
To skip to the next or previous folder  
(Only possible for MP3 or WMA disc)  
IMPORTANT:  
Press 5 (up) while playing a disc  
to skip to the next folder.  
Each time you press the button  
consecutively, the next folder is  
located and the first track in the  
folder starts playing.  
To directly select the folders using the number  
button(s), it is required that folders are  
assigned 2 digit numbers at the beginning of  
their folder names. (This can only be done  
during the recording of CD-Rs or CD-RWs.)  
Ex.: If folder name is “01 ABC”  
= Press 1 to go to Folder 01 ABC.  
If folder name is “1 ABC,” pressing 1  
does not work.  
Press ∞ (down) while playing a disc to skip back  
to the previous folder.  
Each time you press the button consecutively,  
the previous folder is located and the first track in  
the folder starts playing.  
If folder name is “12 ABC”  
= Press and hold 6 (12) to go to Folder  
12 ABC.  
Note:  
Press the number button corresponding to the  
folder number to start playing the first track in the  
selected folder.  
If the folder does not contain any MP3 or WMA  
tracks, it is skipped.  
• To select a folder number from 01 – 06:  
Press 1 (7) – 6 (12) briefly.  
• To select a folder number from 07 – 12:  
Press and hold 1 (7) – 6 (12) for more than one  
second.  
Notes:  
• If “No Music” appears on the display after you  
have selected a folder, it means that the folder does  
not contain any MP3 or WMA tracks.  
• You cannot directly select a folder with a number  
greater than 12.  
To select a particular track in a folder, press  
¢
or 4  
after selecting the folder.  
27  
Selecting a track and start playback  
Selecting a folder and a track  
using the name lists  
1 Press and hold 5 (up) or ∞ (down)  
so that the folder name list of the  
inserted disc appears on the  
display.  
The following operations are only possible  
when playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
The current playing folder  
will be highlighted on the  
display.  
You can show the folder name and track name  
lists on the display while playing a disc. Then,  
select a folder or a track you want to start  
playback with.  
Selecting a folder and start playback  
Current folder number  
1 Press and hold 5 (up) or ∞ (down)  
so that the folder name list of the  
inserted disc appears on the  
display.  
The current playing folder  
will be highlighted on the  
display.  
2 Press ¢  
or 4  
to show the  
track name list of the current folder.  
The current playing track  
will be highlighted on the  
display.  
Current folder number  
Current track number  
Notes:  
•
The display can shows only six names at a  
time. You can show the other names on the  
next lists by pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).  
Each time you press the button, the folder  
name list and track name list appear  
alternately.  
•
If you press ¢  
or 4  
, the track name  
list of the current playing folder appears.  
Each time you press the button, the folder name  
list and track name list appear alternately.  
Only folders with MP3 or WMA tracks will be  
listed.  
Note:  
The display can shows only six names at a time.  
You can show the other names on the next lists  
by pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).  
•
3 Select the number (1 – 6) for the  
2 Select the number (1 – 6) for the folder  
track you want to play.  
you want to play.  
28  
To play back tracks repeatedly  
(Repeat Play)  
Selecting the playback modes  
To play back tracks at random  
(Random Play)  
You can play back the current track (or a folder  
for MP3 and WMA discs) repeatedly.  
You can play back all tracks on the disc (or a  
folder for MP3 and WMA discs) at random.  
1 Press M MODE while playing a CD.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
1 Press M MODE while playing a CD.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
2 Press number button 2 repeatedly while  
“Mode” is still on the display.  
2 Press number button 3 repeatedly while  
“Mode” is still on the display.  
Each time you press the button, repeat play  
mode changes as follows:  
Each time you press the button, random play  
mode changes as follows:  
For audio CD and CD Text discs:  
For audio CD and CD Text discs:  
For MP3 and WMA discs:  
For MP3 and WMA discs:  
Active  
indicator  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
Active  
indicator  
Repeat  
Track  
(track  
repeat) indicator  
lights up.  
The current (or  
specified) track.  
Mode  
Plays at random  
Random  
Folder*  
All tracks of the  
(folder random)  
indicator lights  
up.  
current folder, then  
tracks of the next  
folder and so on.  
Repeat  
Folder* repeat) indicator  
lights up.  
(folder  
All tracks of the  
current (or  
specified) folder of  
the disc.  
Random  
Disc  
(disc  
All tracks on the  
random) indicator disc.  
lights up.  
* “Repeat Folder” can be used for MP3 and WMA  
discs only.  
* “Random Folder” can be used for MP3 and WMA  
discs only.  
To cancel repeat play, select “Repeat Off” by  
pressing number button 2 repeatedly or press  
number button 4 in step 2.  
To cancel random play, select “Random Off” by  
pressing number button 3 repeatedly or press  
number button 4 in step 2.  
29  
To play back only intros  
(Intro Scan)  
You can play back the first 15 seconds of each  
track sequentially.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can prohibit disc ejection and can lock a disc  
in the loading slot.  
While pressing SEL (select), press and  
hold 0 (eject) for more than 2 seconds.  
1 Press M MODE while playing a CD.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
2 Press number button 1 repeatedly while  
“Mode” is still on the display.  
“No Eject” flashes on the display for about  
5 seconds, and the disc is locked and cannot be  
ejected.  
If you press 0 (eject) again, the control panel  
moves down but the disc is not ejected. “No  
Eject” flashes on the display.  
Each time you press the button, intro scan  
mode changes as follows:  
For audio CD and CD Text discs:  
To cancel the prohibition and unlock the  
disc  
While pressing SEL (select), press and hold  
0 (eject) again for more than 2 seconds.  
“Eject OK” flashes on the display for about  
5 seconds, and the disc is unlocked.  
For MP3 and WMA discs:  
Active  
indicator  
Plays the beginnings  
(15 seconds) of  
Mode  
Intro  
(track All tracks on the  
Track  
intro) indicator disc.  
lights up.  
Intro  
The first track of every  
folder of the disc.  
Folder* (folder intro)  
indicator lights  
up.  
* “Intro Folder” can be used for MP3 and WMA  
discs only.  
To cancel intro scan, select “Intro Off” by  
pressing number button 1 repeatedly or press  
number button 4 in step 2.  
30  
Changing the display pattern  
By pressing D DISP, you can change the information shown on the display.  
If the information cannot be shown at a time, it will scroll on the display. See also “To  
select the scroll mode for disc information and the DAB text—Scroll” on page 48.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown (will be blanked or substituted) on the  
display.  
Each time you press the button, the display patterns change as follows:  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text disc:  
While playing an MP3 or a WMA disc when  
“Tag” is set to “Off”:  
Clock time  
Clock time  
Current track  
number  
Track name  
Notes:  
Notes:  
• When the folder name is shown, the  
indicator lights up. When the track name is shown,  
the (track) indicator lights up.  
• If “Tag” is set to “On” (see pages 48 and 49), ID3  
tag information will appear on the display if the  
disc has an ID3 tag.  
• When the disc title/performer is shown, the  
(disc) indicator lights up. When the track title is  
shown, the  
• If no name is assigned to the audio CD, “NO  
NAME” will appear. To assign a name to an audio  
CD, see page 53.  
• If no disc title/performer or no track title is  
recorded for the CD Text, “NO NAME” will appear.  
(folder)  
(track) indicator lights up.  
The album name/performer with  
(disc)  
indicator appear on the display instead of the folder  
name; while track title with  
(track) indicator  
appear instead of the track name.  
31  
SOUND ADJUSTMENTS  
Adjusting the sound  
2 Make adjustments.  
• To adjust fader and balance—Fad, Bal:  
You can make these two adjustments at  
the same time.  
You can set the speaker output balance,  
subwoofer output level, and input level of each  
source.  
• If you are using a two-speaker system,  
set the fader level to “00.”  
• There is a time limit in doing the following  
procedure. If the setting is canceled before you  
finish, start from step 1 again.  
• Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down)  
to adjust the fader.  
• Press ¢  
or 4  
to adjust the balance.  
1 Select the item you want to adjust.  
The next-step-operation  
buttons start flashing.  
Each time you press the  
button, the adjustable items  
change as follows:  
• To adjust subwoofer output—Sub Out:  
This takes effect only when a subwoofer is  
connected.  
To increase the level  
To decrease the level  
• For iEQ (sound mode) settings,  
see pages 33 – 35.  
• For THEME (display theme) settings,  
see page 36.  
Indication  
To do:  
Range  
Fad  
Adjust the front  
and rear speaker  
balance.  
R06 (Rear only)  
|
F06 (Front only)  
You can also set an appropriate cutoff  
frequency level according to the subwoofer  
connected.  
Bal  
Adjust the left  
and right speaker  
balance.  
L06 (Left only)  
|
R06 (Right only)  
• Press ¢  
or 4  
to select “Low,”  
“Mid,” or “High.”  
Sub Out  
Adjust the  
00 (min.)  
|
12 (max.)  
Low/Mid/High  
Low: Frequencies higher than 50 Hz are  
cut off to the subwoofer.  
Mid: Frequencies higher than 80 Hz are  
cut off to the subwoofer.  
subwoofer output  
level and cutoff  
frequency level.  
High: Frequencies higher than 115 Hz are  
cut off to the subwoofer.  
Vol Adj  
Adjust and store –12 (min.)  
the input level  
|
of each source.  
+12 (max.)  
32  
• To adjust the input level of each source  
—Vol Adj:  
You can separately store this setting for  
each source except FM. Before making an  
adjustment, select an appropriate source  
for which you want to make an  
Selecting preset sound modes  
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
You can select a preset sound mode (iEQ:  
intelligent equalizer) suitable to the music genre.  
adjustment.  
• There is a time limit in doing the following  
procedure. If the setting is canceled before you  
finish, start from step 1 again.  
Once you have adjusted it, it is memorized,  
and you will not need to adjust the volume  
level each time you change the source.  
Available sound modes:  
Adjust the input level to match it to the FM  
sound level.  
• You cannot make an adjustment if the  
source is FM. “FIX” will appear.  
FLAT (No sound mode is applied)  
H.ROCK (Hard Rock)  
R & B (Rhythm and Blues)  
POP (Popular music)  
To increase the level  
To decrease the level  
JAZZ (Jazz music)  
DANCE (Dance music)  
Country (Country music)  
REGGAE (Reggae)  
CLASSIC (Classical music)  
USER 1, USER 2, USER 3  
1 Press SEL (select) once.  
The last selected sound  
mode is called up.  
The next-step-operation  
buttons start flashing.  
Ex.: If you have selected “Flat” previously  
Each time you press the button, the  
adjustable items change as follows:  
• For SEL (basic sound) settings,  
see pages 32 – 33.  
• For THEME (display theme) settings,  
see page 36.  
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE  
33  
To cancel the sound mode, select “FLAT” in  
step 2.  
2 Press the number button to select  
the sound mode you want.  
• This unit has two sound mode selection  
screens. To move to the other screen,  
press 5 (up) or ∞ (down).  
Notes:  
• You can adjust the preset sound modes temporarily.  
However, your temporary adjustments will be reset  
when you select another sound mode.  
• For details about the preset settings of each sound  
mode, see table below.  
To exit from the sound mode selection  
screen, press SEL (select) repeatedly or wait for  
about 5 seconds.  
Press 5 (up) or  
∞ (down).  
Sound modes (preset frequency level settings)  
The list below shows the preset frequency level settings for each sound mode.  
Sound  
Mode  
Preset equalizing values  
60 Hz  
00  
150 Hz  
00  
400 Hz  
00  
1 kHz  
00  
2.4 kHz  
00  
6 kHz  
00  
12 kHz  
00  
Flat  
Hard Rock  
R & B  
+03  
+03  
00  
+03  
+02  
+02  
+02  
+02  
+01  
00  
+01  
+02  
00  
00  
00  
+02  
+01  
+01  
+03  
+01  
+01  
+02  
+02  
00  
+01  
+03  
+02  
+02  
+01  
+02  
+03  
00  
00  
+01  
+01  
+01  
–01  
00  
Pop  
00  
Jazz  
+03  
+04  
+02  
+03  
+02  
00  
+01  
00  
+01  
–02  
00  
Dance Music  
Country  
Reggae  
Classic  
User 1  
User 2  
User 3  
00  
00  
+01  
00  
+02  
00  
+03  
00  
+01  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
34  
Storing your own sound modes  
4 Make adjustments as you like.  
You can adjust the sound modes to your  
preference and store your own adjustments in  
memory (USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3).  
1) Press ¢  
frequency band—60Hz, 150Hz, 400Hz,  
1kHz, 2.4kHz, 6kHz, 12kHz.  
or 4  
to select the  
• There is a time limit in doing the following  
procedure. If the setting is canceled before you  
finish, start from step 1 again.  
2) Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to adjust the  
level of the selected band within the  
range of –05 to +05.  
3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) to adjust the  
other frequency bands.  
1 Press SEL (select) once.  
The last selected sound  
mode is called up.  
The next-step-operation  
buttons start flashing.  
5 Store the adjustment you made.  
The confirmation message  
appears—whether you want  
to store the adjustment.  
Ex.: If you have selected “Country”previously  
2 Select the sound mode you want to  
adjust.  
If you want to cancel the adjustments,  
press D DISP.  
6 Select one of the user sound modes  
(USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3) you  
want to store into.  
• This unit has two sound mode selection  
screens. To move to the other screen,  
press 5 (up) or ∞ (down).  
3 Enter the sound adjustment mode.  
The following sound  
mode adjustment  
screen appears on the  
display.  
Ex.: When you select “User 1”  
35  
View 1:  
A scenery display appears.  
• Positive pattern display:  
Selecting the display theme  
You can select the theme of the display during  
playback.  
• There is a time limit in doing the following  
procedure. If the setting is canceled before you  
finish, start from step 1 again.  
• Negative pattern display:  
1 Select “THEME”.  
Each time you press the  
button, the adjustable items  
change as follows:  
View 2:  
A scenery display appears.  
• Positive pattern display:  
The last selected theme appears on the  
display.  
• Negative pattern display:  
The next-step-operation button starts flashing.  
• For SEL (basic sound) settings,  
see pages 32 – 33.  
• For iEQ (sound mode) settings,  
see pages 33 – 35.  
Meter:  
2 Select the display theme you want.  
The left and right audio level meters appear.  
• If the small animation display is selected, only  
one audio level meter can be shown.  
As you turn the control dial,  
the themes change as  
follows:  
Shake:  
The speaker on the display vibrates as input  
audio level changes.  
Note:  
View 1 and View 2 have positive pattern display and  
negative pattern display (see right column). Either  
positive or negative pattern display is automatically  
selected depending on the “LCD Type” setting (see  
page 48).  
Off:  
Cancels the display theme.  
36  
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS  
With the supplied Image Converter CD-ROM,  
you can edit your own favorite pictures and use  
them as the opening screen, ending screen, and  
graphic screen while playing a source.  
What is Image Converter?  
Image Converter is a JVC’s original software to produce customize images to be shown on your  
JVC Car Audio.  
Here is a basic procedure to make a CD-R including still images (pictures) and animations  
(movies) using Image Converter  
In this manual, we only explain how to export the files (still images and animations) into the built-in  
memory of this unit—step 5 below.  
• For the other processes (from steps 1 to 4 below), refer to Image Converter’s Operation Guide  
(PDF files included in the “Manual” folder of the supplied CD-ROM).  
Install / Start the program  
Install Image Converter on your PC.  
Import the images  
Import the source images from the Image Converter CD-ROM or from other equipment like  
a digital camera or a digital video camera.  
Retouch and edit the images  
Retouch the images like trimming or adjusting color, editing the animation effect, and adding  
the texts.  
Write your images onto a CD-R  
Write the animations or the still images you made with Image Converter using your CD-R  
writing software.  
You have to write the images you made onto a CD-R to enjoy the images on your Car Audio.  
• To write data onto a CD-R, refer also to the instruction of your CD-R writing software.  
Enjoy the animations or the still images you made on your Car Audio  
Export the images to your JVC Car Audio from the CD-R you made.  
37  
Downloading images and  
animations  
1 Open the control panel.  
Before starting the following procedure, prepare  
a CD-R including still images (pictures) and  
animations (movies).  
• The supplied Image Converter CD-ROM  
includes sample images and animations, so  
you can use this disc for your first trial.  
2 Insert a CD-R with the files (images  
and animations you made with  
Image Converter) into the loading  
slot.  
IMPORTANT:  
• Still images (pictures) should have <jml>, and  
animations (movies) should have <jma> as  
their extension code in their file names.  
• Downloading a file can be done only while  
selecting “CD” as the source; on the other  
hand, deleting a file can be done while  
selecting any source.  
The unit draws the  
disc, the control panel  
goes back to the  
previous position (see  
page 54).  
• If the disc includes playable audio files  
such as MP3 tracks, playback starts  
automatically.  
• Before you download or erase the files,  
observe the following:  
– Do not download a file while driving.  
– Do not turn off the ignition key of the car  
while downloading or erasing a file.*  
– Do not detach the control panel while  
downloading or erasing a file.*  
* If you do it, the file download and erasure will  
not be done correctly. In this case, perform  
the same procedure again.  
3 Press M MODE after the disc is  
detected.  
“Mode” appears on the  
display. The next-step-  
operation buttons start  
flashing.  
• If you have already downloaded an  
animation for “Opening,” “Ending,” or  
“Movie,” downloading a new animation  
deletes the previously stored animation.  
• It takes a long time for the unit to download  
an animation.  
4 Press number button 6 to show the  
– About 6 to 7 seconds for a still image  
(one frame).  
download selection screen.  
– About 3 to 4 minutes for an animation of  
30 frames.  
– About 10 minutes for an animation of 90  
frames.  
• While a station (or service for the DAB tuner)  
is being tuned in by one of the Standby  
Reception modes such as TA or PTY, you  
cannot download or delete a file. On the  
other hand, while you are downloading or  
deleting a file, Standby Reception mode will  
not work to have this unit tune in a station  
(or service). It only works after download or  
deletion is over.  
38  
5 Select (highlight) one of the listed  
items for which you want to  
download a file.  
6 Show the name list of the folder  
included in the inserted CD-R.  
“File Check....” appears for a  
while, then the folder list*  
appears.  
• Opening : Opening screen  
The currently selected folder will be  
highlighted on the display.  
To download an animation to be shown  
after the unit is turned on. (You can store  
only one animation consisting of a  
maximum of 30 frames.)  
* You can assign your own names when editing a  
CD-R.  
• Ending : Ending screen  
To download an animation to be shown  
before the unit is turned off. (You can store  
only one animation consisting of a  
maximum of 30 frames.)  
Notes:  
• On this list, the folders including the target  
files—<jml> files for “Picture” and <jma>  
files for the others—are shown.  
• The display can show only six names at a time.  
You can show the other names on the next lists  
by pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).  
• If a disc inserted does not include any <jml>  
and <jma> files, beeps sound and you cannot  
go to the next step.  
• Picture : Graphic screen*  
To download a still image to be shown if  
no operation is done for about 20  
seconds. (You can store 90 still images—  
one frame each.)  
• Movie : Graphic screen*  
To download an animation to be shown if  
no operation is done for about 20  
seconds. (You can store only one  
animation consisting of a maximum of 90  
frames.)  
If you want to cancel the procedure,  
press D DISP.  
7 Select (highlight) a folder in which a  
file you want is included.  
* Graphic screen will appear only if the  
“Graphics” setting is set to one of the  
following—“UserMovie,” “UserSlide,” or  
“UserPict.” (see page 48).  
If you want to cancel the procedure,  
press number button 5, the download  
selection screen goes off.  
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE  
39  
8 Show the name list of the files  
10If it is OK, press number button 1 to  
included in the selected folder.  
start downloading.  
Each time you press  
the button, the lists on  
the display changes as  
follows:  
Downloading starts, and  
“Downloading...” appears on  
the display.  
If it is over, the file name list  
appears again.  
If it is not OK, press number button 5, the  
file selection screen appears again. Repeat  
from step 8 again.  
11Repeat steps 8 to 10 if you are  
downloading files for “Picture” and  
want to store more files.  
Ex.: When you have selected “Picture” in  
step 5  
12Finish the download procedure.  
Note:  
The display can show only six names at a time.  
You can show the other names on the next lists by  
pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).  
To download a file for another item listed on the  
download selection screen, repeat from step 3  
again.  
9 Select (highlight) a file you want to  
download.  
Notes:  
• If you try to store the 91st image for picture screen,  
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start  
downloading. In this case, delete unwanted files  
before downloading.  
• If the total frame number of the downloaded  
animations exceeds the following number, the  
exceeding frames are ignored.  
The file name appears, and the unit will  
ask you “Download OK?”  
– For opening and ending screens: 30 frames  
– For movie screen: 90 frames  
40  
To delete the files stored for “Opening,”  
“Ending,” “Picture (all stored images at a  
time),” and “Movie”  
Deleting unwanted files  
• When “BACK” is shown on the display above  
number button 5, you can go back to the  
previous screen by pressing number button 5.  
1 Press M MODE while playing any source.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
To delete all the stored files at a time  
1 Press M MODE while playing any source.  
2 Press number button 6 to show the download  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
selection screen.  
2 Press number button 6 to show the download  
selection screen.  
3 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to select (highlight)  
one of the listed items.  
3 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to select (highlight)  
all the listed items.  
Appears when “Picture” is  
selected (highlighted)  
4 To delete the file stored in “Opening,”  
“Ending,” and “Movie,” press number button  
3.  
The file name of the previously  
stored animation appears, and  
the unit asks you “Delete OK?”  
4 Press number button 4.  
The unit asks you “All File Delete  
OK?”  
To delete all the files stored in “Picture” at  
a time, press number button 4.  
The unit asks you “All Picture  
Delete OK?”  
5 Press number button 4 again.  
“Now Deleting...” appears while  
erasing the files. When erasure is  
over, the download selection  
screen appears again.  
6 Press number button 5 to resume the source  
indication screen.  
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE  
41  
5 To delete the file stored in “Opening,”  
“Ending,” and “Movie,” press number button  
3 again.  
4 Press number button 3.  
The unit shows the name list of the  
stored files.  
Note:  
The display can show only six names at a time. You  
can show the other names by pressing 5 (up) or  
∞ (down) repeatedly.  
To delete all the files stored in “Picture” at  
a time, press number button 4 again.  
“Now Deleting...” appears while  
erasing all the stored files. When  
erasure is over, the download  
selection screen appears again.  
5 Press the number buttons for the file you want  
to delete.  
6 Press number button 5 to resume the source  
indication screen.  
Selected file name appears, and the unit asks  
you “Delete OK?”  
6 Press number button 3 to start erasure.  
“Now Deleting...” appears while  
erasing the selected file. When  
erasure is over, the name list of  
the stored file appears again.  
To delete the stored files for “Picture”  
(one by one)  
1 Press M MODE while playing any source.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
7 To delete more files, repeat from steps 5 and 6.  
8 Press D DISP to resume the source indication  
screen.  
2 Press number button 6 to show the download  
selection screen.  
3 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to select (highlight)  
“Picture.”  
42  
Activating the downloaded  
images and animations  
3 Select “Opening” (opening screen  
setting) or “Ending” (ending screen  
setting).  
Activating the animations stored for  
opening and ending screens  
After the unit turns on or before the unit turns off,  
you can see preset animations on the display.  
These are called opening screen and ending  
screen.You can use your own edited animations  
for these opening and ending screens.  
• Before performing the following procedure,  
make sure that “KeyIn CFM” is set to “On”;  
otherwise, the animations may not be shown.  
(See page 48.)  
Ex.: When you select “Opening”  
4 Select “User.”  
• If no animation is stored in “Opening” and  
“Ending,” “Opening” and “Ending” cannot be  
selected as a PSM item.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)  
• Default: Factory-preset animation is used.  
• User: Your own edited animation is used.  
5 Finish the setting.  
2 Press number button 1 to select  
“MOVIE”—Movie category of the  
PSM settings.  
Activating the graphic screen using  
either picture or movie  
The “Graphics” setting screen appears on  
the display.  
Using this setting, you can change the graphic  
displays. These graphic screens appear if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds.  
• If no image is stored in “Picture,” or no  
animation in “Movie,” “UserPict.,” “UserMovie”  
and “UserSlide” cannot be selected for the  
“Graphics” setting.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)  
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE  
43  
Selecting a still image for graphic  
display—User Picture  
You cannot select “UserPict.” as a PSM item in  
the following cases:  
• If no image is stored in “Picture,” or  
• “UserPict.” is not selected for the “Graphics”  
setting (see the left column).  
2 Press number button 1 to select  
“MOVIE”—Movie category of the  
PSM settings.  
The “Graphics” setting screen appears on  
the display.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)  
3 Select “UserMovie,”“UserSlide,” or  
“UserPict.”  
2 Press number button 1 to select  
“MOVIE”—Movie category of the  
PSM settings.  
The “Graphics” setting screen appears on  
the display.  
Ex.: When you select  
“UserPict.”  
• UserMovie: Your edited animation stored  
in “Movie” is activated as your  
graphic screen.  
• UserSlide: Your edited still images stored  
in “Picture” are activated and  
shown in sequence as your  
graphic screen.  
• UserPict.: One of your edited still image  
stored in “Picture” is activated  
as your graphic screen.  
3 Select “UserPict.”  
File name of the  
current selected  
image also appears.  
Select one of the stored  
images (see the next  
column).  
4 Finish the setting.  
4 Select a file you want.  
To cancel all graphic displays, select “Off” in  
step 3.  
Note:  
For the “Graphics” setting, you can also select “Int  
Demo,” “All Demo,” and “ImageLink.”  
– See pages 8 and 48 for “Int Demo” and “All Demo.”  
– See pages 25 and 48 for “ImageLink.”  
5 Finish the setting.  
44  
OTHER MAIN FUNCTIONS  
Changing the general settings  
(PSM)  
3 Select the PSM item you want to  
adjust.  
You can change the items listed on the table on  
pages 46 and 47 by using the PSM (Preferred  
Setting Mode) control.  
• The PSM items are grouped into six  
categories—MOVIE, CLOCK, DISP (display),  
TUNER, AUDIO, and COLOR.  
Basic Procedure  
• By pressing ¢  
or 4  
Ex.: To change “Contrast”  
repeatedly, you can also move to another  
category.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(See pages 46 and 47.)  
4 Adjust the PSM item selected.  
The next-step-operation  
buttons start flashing.  
Ex.: If you have selected “Graphics”  
previously  
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust the  
other PSM items if necessary.  
2 Press number button (in this  
example, 3) to select one of the PSM  
categories.  
6 Finish the setting.  
The first-listed item in the selected category  
appears.  
45  
Preferred Setting Mode (PSM) items  
The PSM items are grouped into six categories—MOVIE, CLOCK, DISP (display), TUNER, AUDIO,  
and COLOR.  
Factory-preset  
settings  
See  
page  
Indications  
Selectable values/items  
See page 48 for details  
Int Demo  
On  
8, 25, 48  
Graphics  
Movie demonstration  
Key-in confirmation  
Opening animation  
Ending animation  
User Picture  
On  
Off  
48  
43  
KeyIn CFM  
Opening*1  
Ending*1  
UserPict.*2  
Clock Hr  
Clock Min  
24H/12H  
Default  
User  
Default  
Default  
User  
Default  
First stored  
0 (0:00)  
43  
44  
9
From the stored files  
0 – 23 (1 – 12)  
00 – 59  
Hour adjustment  
Minute adjustment  
24 hours or 12 hours  
00 (0:00)  
24Hours  
9
12Hours  
24Hours  
9
Auto Adj  
Automatic clock  
adjustment  
Off  
On  
21  
48  
On  
Once  
Auto  
Scroll  
Scroll mode  
Once  
Off  
Auto  
Off  
On  
Dimmer  
Dimmer mode  
50  
Auto  
Time Set  
From– To*3  
Contrast  
Dimmer time setting  
Contrast  
Any time – Any time  
1 – 10  
18 – 7  
5
50  
48  
Negative  
Positive  
LCD Type  
Display type  
48  
Auto  
Auto  
Font Type  
Tag  
Font type  
2
1
1
48  
Tag display  
On  
Off  
On  
48, 49  
1
2
3
*
*
*
Displayed only after a downloadable file is stored in memory.  
Displayed only after a downloadable file is stored in memory and while selecting “UserPict.” for “Graphics.”  
Displayed only when “Dimmer” is set to “Time Set.”  
46  
Factory-preset  
settings  
See  
page  
Indications  
PTY Standby  
Selectable values/items  
PTY Stnby  
29 programme types  
(see page 22)  
News  
AF  
18  
AF-Regn’l  
Alternate frequency/  
Regionalization  
reception  
AF  
AF Reg  
16, 17  
Off*4  
TA Volume  
Traffic  
announcement  
volume  
Volume 0 – Volume 30 or 50*5  
Volume 20  
Off  
21  
20  
49  
P-Search  
IF Filter  
Programme search  
Off  
On  
Intermediate  
frequency  
filter  
Wide  
Auto  
Auto  
DAB AF*6  
Alternative frequency  
search  
69  
68  
Off  
On  
On  
Announce*6 Announcement  
9 announcement types  
(see page 68)  
Travel  
standby  
On  
Off  
Changer  
Off  
On  
49  
49  
Beep  
Key-touch tone  
Ext Input*7  
Telephone  
External component  
Telephone Muting  
Line In  
Changer  
Muting1  
Off  
49  
Muting2  
HighPower  
LowPower  
HighPower  
Every  
49  
51  
52  
Amp.Gain  
Amplifier gain control  
Selected source  
User color selection  
Red  
See page 51 for details  
Day Night  
All SRC  
Day  
User  
00 – 11  
00 – 11  
00 – 11  
Day: 07/Night: 05  
Day: 07/Night: 05  
Day: 07/Night: 05  
On  
52  
52  
52  
49  
R
G
B
Green  
Blue  
On  
Off  
SlotLight  
Slot lights  
4
5
6
7
*
*
*
*
Displayed only when “DAB AF” is set to “Off.”  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See page 49 for details.)  
Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.  
Not displayed when the current source is “CD-CH” or “LINE IN.”  
47  
• Off:  
While showing the disc information:  
cancels scroll mode.  
While showing the DAB text: shows  
only headline if any.  
To show the graphics on the display  
—Graphics  
You can change the graphics shown on the display.  
These graphics appear if no operation is done for  
about 20 seconds (except for “ImageLink”).  
To adjust the display contrast level  
—Contrast  
Adjust the display contrast (1 – 10) to make the  
display indications clear and legible.  
• Int Demo: Display demonstration (animation)  
and playback source indication  
appears alternately (see page 8).  
• All Demo: Display demonstration (animation)  
appears (see page 8).  
To select the display illumination pattern  
—LCD Type  
You can select the display illumination patterns  
according to your preference.  
• UserMovie: Your edited animation appears  
(see pages 43 and 44).  
• UserSlide: Your edited still images appears in  
sequence (see pages 43 and 44).  
• UserPict.: One of your edited still image  
appears (see pages 43 and 44).  
• Auto:  
Positive pattern will be selected  
during the day time (depending on  
the “Dimmer” setting); on the other  
hand, negative pattern will be used  
during the night time (depending on  
the “Dimmer” setting).  
• ImageLink: To show a still image while playing  
back an MP3/WMA track (see  
page 25).  
• Off:  
Cancels all graphic display above.  
Note:  
• Positive: Positive (normal) pattern of the  
display.  
• Negative: Negative pattern of the display.  
You can select “UserMovie,” “UserSlide,” and  
“UserPict.” only after downloading the appropriate  
files in memory. (See pages 43.)  
To select the font on the display—Font Type  
You can change the font types used on the  
display. Select either “1” or “2” according to your  
preference.  
To turn the source animation on the  
display on or off—KeyIn CFM  
When changing the source, the display shows  
the source animation.You can turn on or off the  
source animation on the display.  
To turn the tag display on or off—Tag  
• On:  
• Off:  
Turns on the source animation.  
Cancels the source animation.  
An MP3/WMA track can contain track information  
called “ID3 Tag” where its album name,  
performer, track title, etc. are recorded.  
There are two versions–ID3v1 (ID3 Tag version 1)  
and ID3v2 (ID3 Tag version 2). If both ID3v1 and  
ID3v2 are recorded on a disc, ID3v2 information  
will be shown.  
To select the scroll mode for disc  
information and the DAB text—Scroll  
You can select the scroll mode for disc  
information and for the DAB radio text (DLS:  
Dynamic Label Segment).  
• On:  
Turns on the ID3 tag display while  
playing MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Once:  
• Auto:  
While showing the disc information:  
scrolls the disc information only once.  
While showing the DAB text: scrolls  
the detailed DAB text.  
While showing the disc information:  
repeats the scroll (in 5-second  
intervals).  
• If an MP3/WMA track does not  
have ID3 tags, folder name and  
track name appear.  
While showing the DAB text: scrolls  
the detailed DAB text.  
48  
Note:  
To select the telephone muting—Telephone  
If you change the setting from “Off” to  
“On” while playing an MP3/WMA  
track, the tag display will be activated  
when the next track starts playing.  
This mode is used when a cellular phone system  
is connected. Depending on the phone system  
used, select either “Muting1” or “Muting2,”  
whichever mutes the sounds from this unit.  
• Muting1: Selects this if this setting can mute  
the sounds while using the cellular  
phone.  
• Muting2: Selects this if this setting can mute  
the sounds while using the cellular  
phone.  
• Off:  
Turns off the ID3 tag display while  
playing MP3/WMA tracks. (Only the  
folder name and track name can be  
shown.)  
To change the FM tuner selectivity  
—IF Filter  
• Off:  
Cancels the telephone muting.  
In some areas, adjacent stations may interfere  
with each other. If this interference occurs, noise  
may be heard.  
To select the amplifier gain control  
—Amp.Gain  
You can change the maximum volume level of  
this unit. When the maximum power of the  
speakers is less than 50 W, select “LowPower” to  
prevent them from being damaged.  
• Auto:  
When this type of interference  
occurs, this unit automatically  
increases the tuner selectivity so that  
interference noise will be reduced.  
(But the stereo effect will also be  
lost.)  
• LowPower: You can adjust the volume level  
from “Volume 00” to “Volume 30.”  
• Wide:  
Subject to the interference from  
adjacent stations, but sound quality  
will not be degraded and the stereo  
effect will not be lost.  
Note:  
If you change the setting from  
“HighPower” to “LowPower” while  
listening at a volume level more than  
30, the unit automatically changes the  
volume level to “Volume 30.”  
To turn the key-touch tone on or off—Beep  
You can deactivate the key-touch tone if you do  
not want it to beep each time you press a button.  
• HighPower: You can adjust the volume level  
from “Volume 00” to “Volume 50.”  
• On:  
• Off:  
Activates the key-touch tone.  
Deactivates the key-touch tone.  
To turn the slot light on or off—SlotLight  
You can turn off the slot light if you do not want  
the illumination each time you insert/eject the  
disc or when you change the control panel angle.  
To select the external component to use  
—Ext Input  
You can connect the external component to the  
CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input  
Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied).  
• On:  
• Off:  
Activates the illumination.  
Deactivates the illumination.  
To use the external component as the playback  
source through this unit, you need to select  
which component—CD changer or external  
component—to use.  
• Changer: To use the CD changer.  
• Line In:  
To use the external component  
other than CD changer.  
Note:  
For connecting the Line Input Adapter KS-U57 and  
the external component, refer to the Installation/  
Connection Manual (separate volume).  
49  
Selecting the dimmer mode  
4 Set the dimmer mode as you like.  
You can dim the display at night automatically or  
as you set the timer.  
Note:  
Auto Dimmer equipped for this unit may not work  
correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those  
having a control dial for dimming.  
In this case, select any other than “Auto.”  
• Auto:  
Activates Auto Dimmer.  
When you turn on the car  
head lights, the display  
automatically dims.  
• Off:  
• On:  
Cancels Auto Dimmer.  
Always dims the display.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(See pages 46 and 47.)  
• Time Set: Used to set the timer for the  
dimmer mode.  
Note:  
The next-step-operation  
buttons start flashing.  
Selecting “Auto” or “Time Set” may change the  
display pattern to the “Negative” or “Positive”  
pattern if “LCD Type” is set to “Auto.”  
2 Press number button 3 to select  
“DISP”—Display category of the  
PSM settings.  
• If you select “Time Set,” go to the following  
steps to set the timer.  
• If you select any other than “Time Set,” go  
to step 7 to finish the setting.  
5 Select “From– To” to set the timer for  
the dimmer mode.  
3 Press ¢  
or 4  
to select  
“Dimmer.”  
6 Set the timer.  
1 Turn the control dial to select the start  
time.  
2 Press ¢  
once.  
3 Turn the control dial to select the end  
time.  
7 Finish the setting.  
50  
Changing the display color  
3 Select the source that you want to  
set the display color for.  
You can set the display color using the PSM  
control.You can select your favorite color for  
each source (or for all sources).  
You can also create your own colors, and set  
them as the display color.  
Setting the desired color for each source  
Once you have set the color for each source (or  
for all sources), the display illuminates in the  
selected color when the source is selected.  
1
*
*
When you select “All SRC,” you can use the  
same color for all the sources.  
Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(See pages 46 and 47.)  
2
4 Select the display color.  
As you turn the control  
The next-step-operation  
buttons start flashing.  
dial, the colors change  
as follows:  
2 Press number button 6 to select  
“COLOR”—Color category of the  
PSM settings.  
Every*1 O Aqua O Sky O Sea O  
Leaves O Grass O Apple O Rose O  
Amber O Honey O Violet O Grape O  
Pale O User*2 O (back to the  
beginning)  
*1 When you select “Every,” the color changes  
every 2 seconds (changing to every color  
listed above except “User”).  
*2 When you select “User,” the user-edited  
colors—“Day” and “Night” will be applied.  
(See page 52.)  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the  
color for each source (except when  
selecting “All SRC” in step 3).  
6 Finish the setting.  
51  
Creating your own color—User  
You can create your own colors—“Day” and  
“Night,” and select them as the display color for  
any desired source.  
4 Select the user color adjustment  
screen.  
One of the user color  
adjustment screens  
appears.  
“User Day” or “User  
Night” is shown on the  
left side of the display.  
• Day:  
Can be used as your user color during  
the day time*.  
• Night: Can be used as your user color during  
the night time*.  
* Depends on the “Dimmer” setting. (See page 50.)  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(See pages 46 and 47.)  
5 Select “Day” or “Night” which you  
The next-step-operation  
buttons start flashing.  
want to make an adjustment for.  
2 Press number button 6 to select  
“COLOR”—Color category of the  
PSM settings.  
6 Adjust the selected user color.  
1) Press ¢  
or 4  
to select  
one of three primary colors—“R”  
(red), “G” (green), and “B” (blue).  
3 Select “User” as a color.  
The user color will be  
applied to the currently  
selected source (the one  
shown on the upper  
2) Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to  
adjust the selected primary color.  
portion of the display. In  
this example “All SRC”).  
You can adjust within the range of 00 to  
11.  
To select which source to apply your user  
color to, select the target source first by  
pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down), before  
selecting “User” in this step.  
3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) to adjust  
the other primary colors.  
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust the  
other user colors—“Day” or “Night.”  
8 Finish the setting.  
52  
Assigning names to the sources  
You can assign names to CDs (both in this unit  
and in the CD changer) and the external  
component (LINE IN).  
After assigning a name, it will appears on the  
display when you select the source.  
4 Select a character.  
Maximum number of  
Sources  
• About the available  
characters  
characters, see page  
73.  
CDs/CD-CH*  
Up to 32 characters (up  
to 40 discs)  
External component Up to 8 characters  
(LINE IN)  
5 Move the cursor to the next  
(or previous) character position.  
* You cannot assign a name to a CD Text or an MP3/  
WMA disc.  
1 Select a source you want to assign a  
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 until you finish  
name to.  
entering the name.  
7 Finish the procedure while the last  
selected character is flashing.  
When you select a source, the power  
automatically comes on.  
2 While pressing D DISP, press and  
hold SEL (select) for more than  
2 seconds.  
To erase the entered characters  
To erase all the characters at a time, press and  
hold D DISP for more than 1 second as  
described in the procedure above.  
The next-step-operation buttons start  
flashing.  
Notes:  
• When you try to assign a name to the 41st disc,  
“Name Full” appears and you cannot enter the text  
entry mode. In this case, delete unwanted names  
before assignment.  
• When the CD changer is connected, you can assign  
names to CDs in the CD changer. These names can  
also be shown on the display if you insert the CDs  
in this unit.  
Ex.: When you select CD as the source  
3 Select the character set you want  
while the first character position is  
flashing.  
Each time you press the  
button, the character set  
changes as follows:  
53  
Changing the control panel  
angle  
2 Press  
(angle) repeatedly to adjust  
the angle to the position you want.  
You can change the angle of the control panel to  
four positions.  
Notes:  
• If you turn the power off, the control panel  
automatically returns to the closed position. Next  
time you turn on the power, the control panel moves  
to its previous position.  
1 Press and hold  
(angle) until the  
angle adjustment screen appears.  
• Do not press  
(angle) while downloading an  
animation or a picture; otherwise downloading will  
fail.  
Time countdown indicator  
• When the unit reads a disc information, you cannot  
change the control panel angle.  
CAUTION:  
NEVER insert your  
finger in between the  
control panel and the  
unit, as it may get  
caught or hurt.  
There is a time limit in doing the following  
procedure. While time countdown indicator  
appears, do the following procedure.  
The control panel angles changes as follows:  
54  
Attaching the control panel  
Detaching the control panel  
1 Insert the left side of the control  
panel into the groove on the panel  
holder.  
You can detach the control panel when leaving  
the car.  
When detaching or attaching the control panel,  
be careful not to damage the connectors on the  
back of the control panel and on the panel  
holder.  
Detaching the control panel  
Before detaching the control panel, be sure to  
turn off the power.  
1 Unlock the control panel.  
2 Press the right side of the control  
panel to fix it to the panel holder.  
2 Lift and pull the control panel out of  
the unit.  
Note on cleaning the connectors:  
If you frequently detach the control panel, the  
connectors will deteriorate.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened  
with alcohol, being careful not to damage the  
connectors.  
3 Put the detached control panel into  
the provided case.  
Connectors  
55  
CD CHANGER OPERATIONS  
We recommend that you use the JVC MP3-  
compatible CD changer with your unit.  
Playing discs  
Select the CD changer (CD-CH).  
By using this CD changer, you can play back  
your original CD-Rs (Recordable) and CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) recorded either in audio CD format  
or in MP3 format.  
Each time you press the button,  
the source changes as described  
on page 7.  
When you select a source, the  
power automatically comes on.  
• You can also connect other CH-X series  
CD changers (except CH-X99 and CH-X100).  
However, they are not compatible with MP3  
discs, so you cannot play back MP3 discs.  
• You cannot use the KD-MK series CD  
changers with this unit.  
• When the current disc is an MP3 disc:  
Playback starts from the first folder of the  
current disc once file check is completed.  
Selected disc number  
Before operating your CD changer:  
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied with  
your CD changer.  
• If no discs are in the magazine of the CD  
changer or the discs are inserted upside  
down, “No Disc” will flash on the display. If  
this happens, remove the magazine and set  
the discs correctly.  
• If no magazine is loaded in the CD changer,  
“No Magazine” flashes on the display. If this  
happens, insert the magazine in the CD  
changer.  
• If “Reset 01” – “Reset 08” flashes on the  
display, something is wrong with the  
connection between this unit and the CD  
changer. If this happens, check the  
connection and make sure the cords are  
connected firmly. Then, press the reset  
button of the CD changer.  
Current folder/track and  
elapsed playing time  
MP3 indicator  
Note:  
You cannot control and play any WMA disc on the CD  
changer.  
56  
• When the current disc is a CD:  
Playback starts from the first track of the  
current disc.  
To go to a particular disc directly  
Press the number button corresponding to the  
disc number to start its playback (while the CD  
changer is playing).  
Selected disc number  
• To select a disc number from 01 – 06:  
Press 1 (7) – 6 (12) briefly.  
• To select a disc number from 07 – 12:  
Press and hold 1 (7) – 6 (12) for more than  
one second.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
Current track and elapsed playing time  
Press and hold ¢  
during play, to fast-forward  
the track.  
,
Notes:  
• When you press CD/CD-CH, the power  
automatically comes on. You do not have to press  
to turn on the power.  
• If you change the source, CD changer play also  
stops. Next time you select “CD-CH” as the source,  
disc play starts from where playback has been  
stopped previously.  
Press and hold 4  
the track.  
, during play, to reverse  
Note:  
During this operation on an MP3 disc, you can only  
hear intermittent sounds. (The elapsed playing time  
also changes intermittently on the display.)  
To change the display pattern  
By pressing D DISP, you can change the  
information shown on the display.  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Each time you press the button,  
the display patterns change.  
• For details, see page 31.  
Press ¢  
briefly during  
play, to skip ahead to the  
beginning of the next track.  
Each time you press the  
button consecutively, the  
beginning of the next tracks  
is located and played back.  
Press 4  
briefly during play, to skip back to  
the beginning of the current track.  
Each time you press the button consecutively,  
the beginning of the previous tracks is located  
and played back.  
57  
This operation is only possible when  
using JVC MP3-compatible CD changer  
(CH-X1500).  
How to go to the desired track quickly  
• Ex. 1: To select track number 32 while  
playing track number 6  
To go to a track quickly  
1 Press M MODE while playing a disc.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
(Three times)  
(Twice)  
Track 6  
\ 10 \ 20 \ 30 \ 31 \ 32  
• Ex. 2 :To select track number 8 while  
playing track number 36  
See page 38 for this function.  
Ex.: When the current disc is an MP3 disc  
(Three times)  
(Twice)  
Track 36  
\ 30 \ 20 \ 10 \ 9 \ 8  
2 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) while “Mode” is still  
on the display.  
To skip to the next or previous folder  
(only for MP3 discs)  
To skip 10 tracks* forwards to  
the last track  
To skip 10 tracks* backwards to  
the first track  
Press 5 (up) while playing an  
MP3 disc, to go to the next folder.  
Each time you press the button  
consecutively, the next folder is  
located, and the first track in the  
folder starts playback.  
* First time you press 5 (up) or ∞ (down)  
button, the track skips to the nearest higher  
or lower track with a track number of multiple  
ten (ex. 10th, 20th, 30th).  
Then each time you press the button, you can  
skip 10 tracks (see “How to go to the desired  
track quickly” on the right column).  
Press ∞ (down) while playing an MP3 disc, to go  
to the previous folder.  
Each time you press the button consecutively,  
the previous folder is located, and the first track  
in the folder starts playback.  
• After the last track, the first track will be  
selected, and vice versa.  
Note:  
If the current playing disc is an MP3 disc, tracks are  
skipped within the same folder.  
58  
While playing an MP3 disc, you can also show  
the folder name list(s) and track name list(s) on  
the display, then select a folder or track.  
Selecting a disc/folder/track  
using the name lists  
1 While playing an MP3 disc, press and hold  
5 (up) or ∞ (down) until a disc name list  
appears on the display.  
If you forget what discs are loaded in the CD  
changer, you can show the disc name list and  
select a disc in the list shown on the display.  
• The display can show only six names at a time.  
2 Press ¢  
or 4  
to show a folder  
name list of the current disc or track name list  
of the current folder.  
Each time you press the button, the lists on  
the display change as follows:  
1 While playing a disc, press and hold  
5 (up) or ∞ (down) until a disc name  
list appears on the display.  
Disc name list  
Folder name list  
Track name list  
Current folder number  
Ex.: When folder name list is selected  
Current track number  
Selected disc number  
Note:  
If a disc has a disc title (CD Text) or an assigned  
disc name, it will be shown on the display.  
However, if the disc has not been played before,  
its disc number will appear.  
Ex.: When track name list is selected  
2 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to show  
the other disc name list, if  
necessary.  
Note:  
The display can shows only six items at a time. You  
can show the other names on the next lists by  
pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).  
3 Press the number button for the disc, folder,  
or track you want to play.  
3 Select the number (1 – 6) for the disc  
you want to play.  
59  
Note:  
Selecting the playback modes  
MP3 indicator also lights up if the current playing  
disc is an MP3 disc.  
To play back tracks at random  
(Random Play)  
To cancel random play, select “Random Off” by  
pressing number button 3 repeatedly or press  
number button 4 in step 2.  
1 Press M MODE during play.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
To play back tracks repeatedly  
(Repeat Play)  
2 Press number button 3 repeatedly while  
“Mode” is still on the display.  
1 Press M MODE during play.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
2 Press number button 2 repeatedly while  
“Mode” is still on the display.  
Ex.: When you select “Random Disc” while  
playing an MP3 disc  
Each time you press the button, random play  
mode changes as follows:  
For MP3 discs:  
Ex.: When you select “Repeat Track” while  
playing an MP3 disc  
For CDs:  
Each time you press the button, repeat play  
mode changes as follows:  
For MP3 discs:  
Active  
indicator  
Mode  
Plays at random  
Random  
Folder*  
All tracks of the  
(folder random) current folder, then  
For CDs:  
indicator  
lights up.  
tracks of the next  
folder and so on.  
Random  
Disc  
All tracks of  
the current (or  
(disc random)  
indicator lights specified) disc.  
up.  
Random  
All  
All tracks of  
all discs inserted in  
(all random)  
indicator lights the magazine.  
up.  
* “Random Folder” is only applicable for MP3 disc.  
60  
Each time you press the button, intro scan  
mode changes as follows:  
Active  
indicator  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
Repeat  
Track  
(track  
The current (or  
specified) track.  
For MP3 discs:  
repeat)  
indicator lights up.  
Repeat  
(folder  
All tracks of the  
For CDs:  
Folder* repeat) indicator current (or  
lights up. specified) folder of  
the current disc.  
Repeat  
Disc  
(disc  
All tracks of  
repeat) indicator the current (or  
lights up. specified) disc.  
Active  
indicator  
Plays the beginnings  
(15 seconds) of  
Mode  
Intro  
* “Repeat Folder” is only applicable for MP3 disc.  
All tracks of the  
current disc.  
Track  
(track intro)  
indicator  
lights up.  
Note:  
MP3 indicator also lights up if the current playing  
disc is an MP3 disc.  
Intro  
The first track of every  
folder of the current  
Folder* (folder intro)  
To cancel repeat play, select “Repeat Off” by  
pressing number button 2 repeatedly or press  
number button 4 in step 2.  
indicator lights disc.  
up.  
Intro  
Disc  
(disc The first tracks of  
intro) indicator the inserted discs.  
lights up.  
To play back only intros (Intro Scan)  
1 Press M MODE during play.  
* “Intro Folder” is only applicable for MP3 disc.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
Note:  
MP3 indicator also lights up if the current playing  
disc is an MP3 disc.  
2 Press number button 1 repeatedly while  
“Mode” is still on the display.  
To cancel intro scan, select “Intro Off” by  
pressing number button 1 repeatedly or press  
number button 4 in step 2.  
Ex.: When you select “Intro Track” while  
playing an MP3 disc  
61  
EXTERNAL COMPONENT OPERATIONS  
Playing an external component  
3 Adjust the volume.  
You can connect the external component to the  
CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input  
Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied).  
Preparations:  
• For connecting the Line Input Adapter KS-U57 and  
the external component, refer to the Installation/  
Connection Manual (separate volume).  
• Before operating the external component using the  
following procedure, select the external input  
correctly. See “To select the external component to  
use—Ext Input” on page 49.  
4 Adjust the sound as you want.  
(See pages 32 – 35.)  
Changing the display pattern  
By pressing D DISP, you can change the  
information shown on the display.  
1 Select the external component  
Each time you press the button,  
the display patterns change as  
follows:  
(LINE IN).  
• If “LINE IN” does not appear on the display,  
see page 49 and select the external input  
(“LINE IN”).  
Note on One-Touch Operation:  
When you press CD/CD-CH, the power automatically  
Clock time  
comes on. You do not have to press  
on the power.  
to turn  
2 Turn on the connected component  
and start playing the source.  
62  
DAB TUNER OPERATIONS  
We recommend that you use DAB (Digital Audio  
Broadcasting) tuner KT-DB1500 or KT-DB1000  
with your unit.  
If you have another DAB tuner, consult your JVC  
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for your  
DAB tuner.  
Tuning in to an ensemble and  
one of the services  
A typical ensemble has 6 or more programmes  
(services) broadcast at the same time. After  
tuning in to an ensemble, you can select a  
service you want to listen to.  
Before you start....  
Press FM/AM DAB briefly if CD, CD changer, or  
external component is the current source.  
What is DAB system?  
DAB is one of the digital radio broadcasting  
systems available today. It can deliver CD  
quality sound without any annoying  
interference and signal distortion.  
Furthermore, it can carry text, pictures, and  
data.  
In contrast to FM broadcast, where each  
programme is transmitted on its own  
frequency, DAB combines several  
programmes (called “services”) to form one  
“ensemble.”  
1 Select the DAB tuner.  
Each time you press and  
hold the button, the DAB  
tuner and the FM/AM tuner  
are alternately selected.  
In addition, each “service”—called “primary  
service”—can also be divided into its  
components (called “secondary service”).  
With the DAB tuner connected with this unit,  
you can enjoy these DAB services.  
2 Select the DAB band (DAB1, DAB2,  
or DAB3).  
Each time you press the  
button, the DAB band  
changes as follows:  
Note:  
This receiver has three DAB bands (DAB1,  
DAB2, DAB3). You can use any of them to tune  
in to an ensemble.  
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE  
63  
When surrounding noises interfere your  
listening while driving  
If this happens, especially when you are listening  
at a low volume level, you can reinforce the  
sounds to improve for your listening.  
3 Start searching for an ensemble.  
To search for ensembles  
of higher frequency  
For this purpose, some service provides  
Dynamic Range Control signals together with  
their regular program signals.  
To search for ensembles of lower frequency  
When an ensemble is received, searching  
stops.  
1 Press M MODE while listening to a DAB  
service.  
To stop searching before an ensemble is  
received, press the same button you have  
pressed for searching.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
4 Select a service (either primary or  
2 Press number button 1 repeatedly to activate  
the DRC function while “Mode” is still on the  
display.  
secondary) you want to listen to.  
To select the next service  
(If a primary service has  
some secondary services,  
they are selected before the  
next primary service is  
selected.)  
To select the previous service (either  
primary or secondary)  
Each time you press the button, the DRC  
function will be set as follows:  
To tune in to a particular ensemble  
without searching  
Before you start....  
As the number increases, the DRC effect level  
also increases.  
Press FM/AM DAB briefly if CD, CD changer, or  
external component is the current source.  
1 Press and hold FM/AM DAB to select the  
DAB tuner as the source.  
2 Press FM/AM DAB repeatedly to select the  
DAB band (DAB1, DAB2, or DAB3).  
After about  
5 seconds  
3 Press and hold ¢  
or 4  
for more  
than one second.  
4 Press ¢  
or 4  
repeatedly until the  
ensemble you want is reached.  
• If you hold down the button, the frequency  
keeps changing until you release the  
button.  
DRC indicator appears.  
5 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to select a service  
(either primary or secondary) you want to  
listen to.  
64  
• The DRC indicator will be highlighted  
) only when the unit received DRC  
signals from the tuned service.  
4 Select a service of the ensemble you  
(
want to listen to.  
To select the next service  
To cancel the DRC effect, select “DRC Off.”  
To select the previous service  
To restore the FM/AM tuner  
Press and hold FM/AM DAB again.  
5 Press and hold the number button  
(in this example, 1) you want to store  
the selected service into for more  
than 2 seconds.  
Storing DAB services in  
memory  
You can preset up to 6 DAB services in each  
DAB band (DAB1, DAB2, and DAB3) manually.  
Before you start....  
Press FM/AM DAB briefly if CD, CD changer, or  
external component is the current source.  
1 Select the DAB tuner.  
Each time you press and  
hold the button, the DAB  
tuner and the FM/AM tuner  
are alternately selected.  
The display pattern automatically changes  
to the non-animation display and the preset  
number flashes (then the previous display  
pattern resumes).  
6 Repeat the above procedure to store  
other DAB services into other preset  
numbers.  
2 Select the DAB band (DAB1, DAB2,  
or DAB3).  
Each time you press the  
button, the DAB band  
changes as follows:  
Notes:  
• You can only preset primary DAB services. If you  
store a secondary service, its primary service will  
be stored instead.  
• A previously preset DAB service is erased when a  
new DAB service is stored in the same preset  
number.  
• Preset DAB services are erased when the power  
supply to the memory circuit is interrupted (for  
example, during battery replacement). If this  
occurs, preset the DAB services again.  
3 Tune in to an ensemble you want.  
65  
Tuning in to a preset DAB  
service  
1 Select the DAB tuner.  
Each time you press and  
hold the button, the DAB  
tuner and the FM/AM tuner  
are alternately selected.  
You can easily tune in to a preset DAB service.  
Remember that you must store services first. If  
you have not stored them yet, see “Storing DAB  
services in memory” on page 65.  
2 Select the DAB band (DAB1, DAB2  
Before you start....  
or DAB3).  
Press FM/AM DAB briefly if CD, CD changer, or  
external component is the current source.  
Each time you press the  
button, the DAB band  
changes as follows:  
1 Select the DAB tuner.  
Each time you press and  
hold the button, the DAB  
tuner and the FM/AM tuner  
are alternately selected.  
3 Press and hold 5 (up) or ∞ (down)  
until the preset service (primary  
service) list for the current band  
(DAB1, DAB2, or DAB3) appears on  
the display.  
2 Select the DAB band (DAB1, DAB2,  
or DAB3).  
Each time you press the  
button, the DAB band  
changes as follows:  
3 Select the number (1 – 6) for the  
preset DAB service (primary) you  
want.  
Ex.: When you select the preset service  
(primary service) number 1 of the  
DAB1 band  
Note:  
You can show the other DAB band preset service  
(primary service) lists (DAB1, DAB2, or DAB3)  
by pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).  
Note:  
If the selected primary service has some secondary  
services, pressing the same number button repeatedly  
will tune in to the secondary services.  
4 Select the number (1 – 6) for a  
service you want.  
Selecting a preset service using the  
preset service list  
If you forget what services are stored in what  
preset number, you can check the preset service  
list, then select your desired service on the list.  
66  
What you can do more with  
DAB  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more  
than 2 seconds so that one of the  
PSM items appears on the display.  
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)  
With the DAB tuner connected, you can use the  
following convenient functions.  
• Road Traffic News Standby Reception (TA  
Standby Reception)  
• Standby Reception of 9 types of  
Announcement signals  
• PTY Standby Reception  
2 Press number button 4 to select  
“TUNER”—Tuner category of the  
PSM settings.  
• PTY search  
• Tracing the same program (service)  
automatically while driving where the same  
DAB ensemble is not received  
The “PTY Stnby” (standby) setting screen  
appears on the display.  
Road Traffic News Standby Reception  
(TA Standby Reception)  
Road Traffic News Standby Reception (TA  
Standby Reception) allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to the traffic announcement from the  
current source (another service, FM, CD, or other  
connected components).  
3 Select “Announce” (announcement).  
• Operations are exactly the same as explained  
on pages 17 and 18 for FM RDS stations.You  
cannot use Road Traffic News Standby  
Reception (TA Standby Reception) separately  
for the DAB tuner and for the FM tuner.  
To use TA Standby Reception, see page 17.  
To set the TA volume level, see page 21.  
4 Select one of the 9 announcement  
types. (See page 68.)  
Using Announcement Standby  
Reception  
Announcement Standby Reception allows the  
unit to switch temporarily to your favorite service  
(Announcement type).  
Selected announcement  
type appears on the  
display and is stored into  
memory.  
To select your favorite announcement type  
for Announcement Standby Reception  
5 Finish the setting.  
When shipped from factory, Announcement  
Standby Reception has been set to search for  
“Travel” services.  
You can select your favorite announcement type  
for Announcement Standby Reception.  
• If you do not want to change the announcement  
type (from “Travel”to another one), go to page 68.  
67  
• If the ANN indicator flashes, Announcement  
Standby Reception is not yet activated since  
the service being received does not provide  
the signals used for Announcement Standby  
Reception.  
To activate Announcement Standby  
Reception  
1 Press M MODE while listening to a DAB  
service.  
“Mode” appears on the display.  
The next-step-operation buttons  
start flashing.  
To activate Announcement Standby Reception,  
you need to tune in to another service  
providing these signals. Press ¢  
to search for such a service  
(ensemble).  
or  
4
2 Press number button 2 repeatedly to activate  
Announcement Standby Reception while  
“Mode” is still on the display.  
Each time you press the button,  
Announcement Standby Reception turns on  
and off alternately.  
When a service providing these signals is  
tuned in, the ANN indicator stops flashing and  
remains lit. Now Announcement Standby  
Reception is activated.  
How Announcement Standby Reception  
works:  
If a service of the selected Announcement type  
starts broadcasting while the Announcement  
Standby Reception is activated, selected  
announcement type appears and the unit tunes  
into the service.  
Ex.: When the currently selected  
announcement type for Announcement  
Standby Reception is “Travel”  
Note:  
After turning on Announcement Standby Reception,  
you can change the source without canceling  
Announcement Standby Reception. If a service starts  
broadcasting the selected announcement type, this  
unit automatically changes the source and tunes in to  
the service.  
After about  
5 seconds  
The display returns to the source  
indication screen.  
Announcement type  
Travel:  
Programmes about travel  
destinations, package tours, and  
travel ideas and opportunities  
Warning: Warnings about earthquakes,  
tsunami, etc.  
ANN indicator appears.  
(either lights up or flashes)  
News:  
News  
Weather: Weather information  
Event:  
Information about events,  
concerts, etc.  
Special programmes expanding  
on current news or affairs  
Radio information  
The ANN (announcement) indicator either lights  
up or flashes.  
• If the ANN indicator lights up, Announcement  
Standby Reception is activated.  
If a service starts broadcasting a programme  
of the selected announcement type, this unit  
automatically tunes in to the service.  
Special:  
Rad Inf:  
Sports:  
Sport events  
Finance: Reports on commerce, trading,  
the Stock Market, etc.  
68  
Using PTY Standby Reception  
Tracing the same programme  
automatically (Alternative Reception)  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite programme (PTY:  
Programme Type) from any source except AM  
stations.  
• Operations are exactly the same as explained  
on pages 18 and 19 for FM RDS stations.You  
cannot use PTY Standby Reception separately  
for the DAB tuner and for the FM tuner.  
• PTY Standby Reception works for the DAB  
tuner only using a Dynamic PTY, but not a  
Static PTY.  
You can keep listening to the same programme.  
• While receiving a DAB service:  
When driving in an area where a service  
cannot be received, this unit automatically  
tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS  
station, broadcasting the same programme.  
• While receiving an FM RDS station:  
When driving in an area where a DAB service  
is broadcasting the same programme as the  
FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit  
automatically tunes in to the DAB service.  
To select your favorite PTY code for PTY  
Standby Reception, see page 18.  
To use Alternative Reception  
When shipped from the factory, Alternative  
Reception is activated.  
• See also “Changing the general settings  
(PSM)” on page 45.  
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more than  
2 seconds so that one of the PSM items  
appears on the display.  
2 Press number button 4 to select “TUNER”—  
Tuner category of the PSM settings.  
To set PTY Standby Reception, see pages 18  
and 19.  
• You can set PTY Standby Reception when the  
source is either “FM” or “DAB.”  
Searching for your favorite service  
You can search for any one of the PTY codes  
(either Dynamic or Static PTY).  
In addition, you can store your 6 favorite  
programme types in the number buttons (see  
pages 19 and 20).  
3 Press ¢  
or 4  
(alternative frequency).  
to select “DAB AF”  
4 Turn the control dial to select the desired  
mode.  
• Operations are exactly the same as explained  
on pages 19 and 20 for FM RDS stations.  
However, you cannot store PTY codes in the  
number buttons separately for the DAB tuner  
and for the FM tuner.  
• On: Traces the programme among DAB  
services and FM RDS stations  
—Alternative Reception. The AF  
indicator lights up on the display (see  
page 16).  
• Off: Alternative Reception is deactivated.  
5 Press SEL (select) to finish the setting.  
To store your favorite programme (service)  
types, see pages 19 and 20.  
Note:  
To search for your favorite programme  
(service) type, see page 20.  
• Search will be performed on the DAB tuner  
only.  
When Alternative Reception (for DAB services) is  
activated, Network-Tracking Reception (for RDS  
stations: see page 16) is also activated automatically.  
On the other hand, Network-Tracking Reception  
cannot be deactivated without deactivating  
Alternative Reception.  
69  
Changing the display pattern  
By pressing D DISP, you can change the information shown on the display.  
Each time you press the button, the display patterns change as follows:  
Large animation display  
Ensemble label (name) display  
Text indicator*1  
Ensemble label  
and Frequency  
Clock time Channel  
number  
Service label (name) display  
3
*
Service label  
PTY code*2  
Clock time display  
Dynamic Label Segment (DLS) display*4  
*1 TEXT indicator: implies the current service received is providing DLS (Dynamic Label Segment—DAB radio  
text information).  
*2 Each service can have several PTY codes. If a service have several PTY codes, they will be shown in turn.  
*3 Ensemble label (primary service) indicator: The different indicator (  
) will be displayed when the  
secondary service is selected.  
*4 Dynamic Label Segment (DLS) will be displayed. See “To select the scroll mode for disc information and the  
DAB text—Scroll” on page 48.  
70  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
• Sound cannot be heard  
from the speakers.  
The volume level is set to the  
minimum level.  
Adjust it to the optimum level.  
Connections are incorrect.  
Check the cords and connections.  
• This unit does not work  
at all.  
The built-in microcomputer  
functions incorrectly due to  
noise, etc.  
Press the reset button on the  
control panel. (Your preset  
adjustments will also be  
erased.) (See page 2.)  
• “Panel Connect Error”  
appears on the display.  
The control panel is not attach  
correctly and firmly.  
Remove the control panel, wipe  
the connectors, then attach it  
again. (See page 55.)  
• When “Reset P00” to  
“Reset P44” appears on  
the display.  
There is something blocking the Press the reset button on the  
control panel movement.  
control panel. (See page 2.) If  
the reset button does not work,  
check the installation. (Ex. you  
have used a screw which is  
longer than specified.)  
• SSM (Strong-station  
Sequential Memory)  
automatic preset does  
not work.  
Signals are too weak.  
Store stations manually.  
• Static noise while  
listening to the radio.  
The aerial is not connected  
firmly.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• Disc cannot be played back. Disc is inserted upside down.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be CD-R/CD-RW is not finalized.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/  
CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW  
with the component which  
you used for recording.  
played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/  
CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Disc cannot be ejected.  
Disc is locked.  
Unlock the disc. (See page 30.)  
• Disc cannot be  
recognized (“No Disc,”  
“Loading Error,” or “Eject  
Error” flashes on the  
display.)  
The CD player may function  
incorrectly.  
While pressing  
(standby/on attenuator), press  
and hold 0 (eject) for more than  
2 seconds to eject the disc.  
Before re-inserting a disc, wait  
for several seconds.  
• Disc sound is sometimes You are driving on rough roads.  
interrupted.  
Stop playback while driving on  
rough roads.  
Disc is scratched.  
Change the disc.  
Connections are incorrect.  
Check the cords and connections.  
Insert a disc into the loading slot.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• “No Disc” flashes on the  
display.  
No disc in the loading slot.  
Disc is inserted incorrectly.  
71  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
• Disc cannot be played  
back.  
No MP3/WMA tracks are  
recorded on the disc.  
Change the disc.  
MP3/WMA tracks do not have  
the extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma> in their file names.  
Add the extension code  
<.mp3> or <.wma> to their file  
names.  
MP3/WMA tracks are not  
Change the disc.  
recorded in the format compliant (Record MP3/WMA tracks using  
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,  
Romeo, or Joliet.  
a compliant application.)  
• “Not Support” appears  
and tracks skip.  
Tracks are not encoded in an  
appropriate format.  
Insert a disc that contains tracks  
encoded in an appropriate  
format.  
WMA tracks are copy-protected. This is normal. Copy-protected  
tracks cannot be played back.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an  
Skip to another track or change  
MP3/WMA track (although it has the disc. (Do not add the  
the extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is  
required. (“File Check”  
keeps flashing on the  
display).  
Readout time varies due to the  
complexity of the folder/track  
configuration.  
Do not use too many hierarchies  
and folders.  
• Tracks cannot be played Playback order is determined  
Insert a disc that contains tracks  
encoded in an appropriate  
format.  
back as you have  
when the tracks are recorded.  
intended them to play.  
• Elapsed playing time is  
not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during  
play. This is caused by how the  
tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “No Files” flashes on the The current disc does not  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/  
WMA tracks.  
display.  
contain any MP3/WMA track.  
• “No Music” appears on  
the display.  
The current folder does not  
contain any MP3/WMA tracks.  
Select another folder that  
contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
Only <jml> and/or <jma> files  
are recorded on the disc.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3  
or WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are  
This unit can only display  
not displayed. (e.g. album alphabets (capital: A–Z, small: a  
name)  
– z), numbers, and a limited  
number of symbols, and some  
accented letters (see page 73).  
72  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
• Download does not  
seem to finish.  
You are trying to download an  
animation of many frames.  
This is normal (see page 38).  
• Animation does not move.  
Temperature in the car  
compartment is very low—  
(LOW TEMP.) indicator  
appears.  
Wait until the operating  
temperature resumes—until  
(LOW TEMP.) indicator  
goes off.  
• “Movie” category settings  
in the PSM do not take  
effect.  
• No indication appears on  
the display at all.  
The built-in microcomputer may Press the reset button on the  
function incorrectly due to  
noise, etc.  
control panel. (Your preset  
adjustments will also be erased.)  
(See page 2.)  
• “No Disc” flashes on the  
display.  
No disc is in the magazine.  
Insert discs into the magazine.  
Discs are inserted upside down. Insert discs correctly.  
• “No Magazine” flashes  
on the display.  
No magazine is loaded in the  
CD changer.  
Insert the magazine.  
• “Reset 08” flashes on the  
display.  
This unit is not connected to the Connect this unit and the  
CD changer correctly.  
CD changer correctly and press  
the reset button of the CD  
changer.  
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07”  
flashes on the display.  
Press the reset button of the CD  
changer.  
• The CD changer does  
not work at all.  
The built-in microcomputer may Press the reset button on the  
function incorrectly due to  
noise, etc.  
control panel. (Your preset  
adjustments will also be erased.)  
(See page 2.)  
Available characters  
In addition to the alphabets (A – Z, a – z), you can use the following characters to assign names to  
CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer) and external component (LINE IN). (See page 53.)  
• These characters can be also used to show other information such as disc title/performer, RDS,  
and DAB on the display.  
Accented letters  
Numbers and symbols  
Upper case  
Lower case  
73  
MAINTENANCE  
When playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
Handling discs  
Before playing back CD-Rs or CD-RWs, read  
their instructions or cautions carefully.  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played  
back on this unit because of their disc  
characteristics, and for the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs,  
CD-Rs (Recordable), CD-RWs (Rewritable), and  
CD Texts.  
• This unit is also compatible with MP3 and  
WMA discs.  
– Moisture condensation on the lens inside the  
unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time  
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than  
that of regular CDs.  
• CD-Rs or CD-RWs are susceptible to high  
temperatures or high humidity, so do not leave  
them inside your car.  
• Do not use following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal  
stuck to the surface.  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc  
Center holder  
from its case, press down  
the center holder of the case  
and lift the disc out, holding  
it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not  
touch its recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed  
by an ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidity may cause malfunctions or  
damage to discs. For example,  
– Stickers or labels may shrink and warp a  
disc.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not be played  
correctly. If a disc does become dirty,  
wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight  
line from center to edge.  
– Stickers or labels may peel off so discs  
cannot be ejected.  
– Print on discs may get sticky.  
Read instructions or cautions about labels and  
printable discs carefully.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub  
the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
CAUTIONS:  
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CDs) into the  
loading slot. (Such discs cannot be ejected.)  
• Do not insert any disc of unusual shape—like a  
heart or flower; otherwise, it will cause a  
malfunction.  
Moisture condensation  
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or any  
heat source or place them in a place subject to  
high temperature and humidity. Do not leave  
them in a car.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example,  
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,  
benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
CD player in the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave  
the unit turned on for a few hours until the  
moisture evaporates.  
Warped  
disc  
Sticker  
Stick-on  
label  
Sticker  
Disc  
residue  
74  
SPECIFICATIONS  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type: Compact disc player  
Front:  
Rear:  
50 W per channel  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Dynamic Range: 96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 decoding format:  
Front:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than  
0.8% total harmonic distortion.  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz  
to 20 000 Hz at no more than  
0.8% total harmonic distortion.  
Rear:  
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3  
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Equalizer Control Range:  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 Kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) decoding format:  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 Kbps  
Frequencies: 60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz,  
1 kHz, 2.4 kHz, 6 kHz, 12 kHz  
Level:  
10 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other terminals:  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Grounding System: Negative ground  
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
SUBWOOFER  
Changer control  
Steering wheel remote input  
Installation Size (approx.):  
182 mm × 52 mm × 159 mm  
Panel Size (approx.):  
188 mm × 58 mm × 12 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
1.6 kg (excluding accessories)  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
AM: (MW)  
(LW)  
522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
144 kHz to 279 kHz  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
[FM Tuner]  
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 µV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 µV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation: 30 dB  
Capture Ratio: 1.5 dB  
[MW Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 20 µV  
Selectivity: 35 dB  
[LW Tuner]  
Sensitivity: 50 µV  
75  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?  
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück  
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts  
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?  
Réinitialisez votre appareil  
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil  
Hebt u PROBLEMEN met de bediening?  
Stel het apparaat terug  
Zie de pagina met de paragraaf Het apparaat terugstellen  
EN, GE, FR, NL  
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
0204KKSMDTJEIN  
KD-LH401  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
Handleiding voor installatie/aansluiting  
GET0203-005A  
[E/EX]  
0204KKSMDTJEIN  
EN, GE, FR, NL  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
FRANÇAIS  
NEDERLANDS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC,  
NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your  
vehicle does not have this system, a voltage  
inverter is required, which can be purchased at  
JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des  
sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse  
NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type  
d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de  
tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un  
revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
Dit apparaat mag worden gebruikt bij elektrische  
systemen die werken op 12 V gelijkstroom met  
negatieve aarding. Als uw auto niet is uitgerust  
met een dergelijk systeem, is een spanningsomzetter  
vereist. Dit instrument kan worden aangeschaft bij  
JVC car audio dealers.  
elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V Gleichstrom  
und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr  
Fahrzeug nicht über diese Anlage, ist ein  
Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC  
Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.  
Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß  
Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit  
diesem Gerät geliefert.  
Lijst van onderdelen die u bij  
installatie en aansluiting nodig hebt  
De volgende onderdelen worden bij het apparaat  
geleverd.  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et  
raccordement  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet  
appareil.  
Parts list for installation and  
connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit.  
After checking them, please set them correctly.  
Nach ihrer Überprüfung, die Teile richtig einsetzen.  
Installeer ze op de juiste wijze, nadat u ze hebt  
gecontroleerd.  
Après vérification, veuillez les placer correctement.  
A / B  
Hard case/Control panel  
Etui/Schalttafel  
Etui de transport/Panneau  
de commande  
Behuizing/Bedieningspaneel  
C
D
E
F
Sleeve  
Halterung  
Manchon  
Huis  
Trim plate  
Frontrahmen  
Plaque d’assemblage  
Power cord  
Stromkable  
Cordon  
d’alimentation  
Stroomkabel  
Remote controller  
Fernbedienung  
Télécommande  
Afstandsbediening  
Sierplaat  
L
CD-ROM  
M
Battery  
G
H
I
J
K
(Image Converter)  
CD-ROM  
(Image Converter)  
CD-ROM  
(Image Converter)  
CD-ROM  
Batterie  
Pile  
Batterij  
Washer (ø5)  
Unterlegscheibe  
(ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Sluitring (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Sicherungsmutter (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
Contra-moer (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M5 x 20 mm)  
Befestigungsschraube  
(M5 x 20 mm)  
Boulon de montage  
(M5 x 20 mm)  
Rubber cushion  
Gummipuffer  
Amortisseur en  
caoutchouc  
Rubberdop  
Handles  
Griffe  
Poignées  
Hendels  
CR2025  
(Image Converter)  
Bevestigingsbout (M5 x 20 mm)  
INSTALLATION  
EINBAU  
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE  
INSTALLATIE (INBOUW IN  
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)  
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen  
DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD) HET DASHBOARD)  
The following illustration shows a typical  
installation. If you have any questions or require Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn  
L’illustration suivante est un exemple  
d’installation typique. Si vous avez des  
Op de volgende afbeelding kunt u zien hoe de  
installatie, normaal gesproken, in zijn werk gaat.  
Neem bij vragen of voor meer bijzonderheden over  
inbouwpakketten contact op met uw JVC car audio  
dealer of een dealer of een bedrijf dat  
information regarding installation kits, consult  
your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or  
a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit  
correctly, have it installed by a qualified  
technician.  
Sie Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des  
brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC  
Autoradiohändler oder ein Unternehmen das  
diese Einbausätze vertreibt.  
• Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des  
Geräts nicht sicher, lassen Sie es von einem  
qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.  
kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur  
d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie  
d’approvisionnement.  
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer  
correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par  
un technicien qualifié.  
inbouwpakketten levert.  
• Als u niet zeker weet hoe u dit apparaat moet  
installeren, kunt u dit beter door een daartoe  
gekwalificeerde technicus laten doen.  
!
Do the required electrical connections.  
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen  
Anschlüsse vor.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
Breng de vereiste elektrische verbindingen tot stand.  
Fit the protrusions outside  
the unit.  
Die Vorsprünge außen am  
Gerät anpassen.  
Fixez les protubérances à  
l’extérieur de l’appareil.  
Plaats de uitsteeksels buiten  
het toestel.  
~
Ÿ
@
*1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to  
damage the fuse on the rear.  
*1 Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß  
die Sicherung auf der Rückseite nicht  
beschädigt wird.  
⁄
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
¤
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um  
die Manschette sicher festzuhalten.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées  
pour maintenir le manchon en place.  
Buig de vereiste lipjes zodat de huls goed  
op zijn plaats wordt gehouden.  
*1 Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale,  
faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible  
situé sur l’arrière.  
1
*
Wanneer u het apparaat rechtop zet, moet u erop  
letten dat u de zekering aan de achterkant niet  
beschadigt.  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear  
section.  
Ausbau des Geräts  
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil  
freigeben.  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section  
arrière.  
Verwijderen van het apparaat  
Voordat u het apparaat verwijdert, moet u het  
achtergedeelte losmaken.  
1
4
2
3
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann  
ziehen wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß  
das Gerät entfernt werden kann.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la  
façon illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
Plaats de twee hendels en trek ze vervolgens  
zoals afgebeeld naar voren zodat het toestel kan  
worden verwijderd.  
1
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der  
Anker-Option / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en option /  
Wanneer u de steun gebruikt (facultatief)  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne  
Halterung / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon / Wanneer u  
het apparaat zonder huis installeert  
In a Toyota for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Fire wall  
Feuerwand  
Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.  
Par exemple dans une Toyota, retirer d’abord l’autoradio et installer l’appareil à la place.  
Voorbeeld: Bij een Toyota moet u eerst de autoradio verwijderen en daarna het apparaat installeren.  
Cloison  
Brandscherm  
Stay (option)  
Anker (Option)  
Hauban (en option)  
Steun (facultatief)  
Flat type screws (M5 x 8 mm)*  
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 x 8 mm)*  
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm) *  
Platkopschroeven (M5 x 8 mm)*  
* Not included with this unit.  
* Nicht Teil dieses Geräts.  
* Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
* Niet meegeleverd.  
Dashboard  
Bracket*  
Konsole*  
Support *  
Console*  
Armaturenbrett  
Tableau de bord  
Dashboard  
Screw (option)  
Flat type screws (M5 x 8 mm)*  
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 x 8 mm)*  
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm) *  
Platkopschroeven (M5 x 8 mm)*  
Schraube (Option)  
Vis (en option)  
Schroef (facultatief)  
Pocket  
Taschen  
Poche  
Zak  
Bracket*  
Konsole*  
Support *  
Console*  
Note  
:When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer  
screws are used, they could damage the unit.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von  
weniger als 30˚ auf.  
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de  
30˚.  
Hinweis  
:Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet  
werden. Werden längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.  
Remarque :Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une  
longueur de 8 mm. Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
Opmerking :Wanneer u het apparaat aan de bevestigingsklem vastmaakt, moet u de 8 mm lange schroeven gebruiken. Als u  
langere schroeven gebruikt, kan het apparaat worden beschadigd.  
Installeer het toestel met een hoek kleiner dan 30˚.  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES ELEKTRISCHE VERBINDINGEN  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that  
you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal  
and make all electrical connections before  
installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s  
chassis again after installation.  
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen  
wir, daß Sie den negativen Batterieanschluß  
abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse  
herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.  
• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem  
Einbau a Chassis des Fahrzeugs geerdet  
wird.  
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous  
recommandons de débrancher la borne  
négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les  
raccordements électriques avant d’installer  
l’appareil.  
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la  
mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis  
de la voiture après l’installation.  
Om kortsluiting te voorkomen adviseren wij u om de  
minpool van de accu los te maken en alle elektrische  
verbindingen tot stand te brengen voordat u het  
apparaat in de auto installeert.  
• Aard dit toestel beslist weer op het chassis  
van de auto na het installeren.  
Notes:  
Opmerkingen:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified  
rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your • Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden  
JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers  
with maximum power of more than 50 W (both  
Hinweise:  
• Vervang de zekering door een exemplaar met het  
aangegeven vermogen. Als de zekering vaak  
doorslaat, moet u uw JVC car audio dealer  
raadplegen.  
• Sluit bij voorkeur luidsprekers met een hoger  
maximaal vermogen dan 50 W (zowel achter als  
voor, met een impedantie van 4 Ω t/m 8 Ω) aan.  
Indien het maximale vermogen lager dan 50 W is,  
moet u “Amp.Gain” in de andere stand stellen  
zodat de luidsprekers niet kunnen worden  
beschadigd (zie bladzijde 49 van de  
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING).  
• Om kortsluiting te voorkomen, moet u de  
aansluitklemmen van ONGEBRUIKTE gekleurde  
draden met isolatieband bedekken.  
• De warmte-opnemer kan na gebruik erg heet  
worden. Raak de warmte-opnemer niet aan  
wanneer u dit apparaat van zijn plaats haalt.  
Remarques:  
Nennleistung ersetzen. Brennt die Sicherung  
häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC  
Autoradiohändler.  
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur  
précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter  
votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
at the rear and at the front, with an impedance • Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer  
• Il est recommandé de connecter des  
enceintes avec une puissance de plus de  
50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes  
avant, avec une impédance comprise entre  
4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est  
inférieure à 50 W, changez “Amp.Gain” pour  
éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page  
49 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les  
bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS  
avec de la bande isolante.  
of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less  
than 50 W, change “Amp.Gain” setting to  
prevent the speakers from being damaged  
(see page 49 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of  
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be  
Maximalleistung von mehr als 50 W  
anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne,  
mit einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die  
Maximalleistung weniger als 50 W beträgt,  
stellen Sie „Amp.Gain“ anders ein, um Schäden  
an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite  
49 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
careful not to touch it when removing this unit. • Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die  
Anschlußklemmen der NICHT  
VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit  
Isolierklebeband umwickeln.  
• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch  
sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau des Geräts darauf  
achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.  
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud  
après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le  
toucher en retirant cet appareil.  
Heat sink  
Abstrahlblech  
Dissipateur de chaleur  
Warmte-opnemer  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply  
and speaker connections:  
VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim  
Anschließen der Stromversorgung  
und Lautsprecher:  
• Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels  
NICHT an der Autobatterie anschließen, da  
sonst das Gerät schwer beschädigt wird.  
• VOR dem Anschließen der  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et  
la connexion des enceintes:  
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes  
du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie;  
sinon, l’appareil serait sérieusement  
endommagé.  
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du  
cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez  
le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.  
VOORZORGSMAATREGELEN bij het  
verbinden van de stroomkabeldraad  
met de speakers:  
• Verbind de speakerdraden van de  
stroomkabel NIET met de accu van de  
auto; als u dit wel doet, zal het apparaat  
ernstige schade oplopen.  
• VOORDAT u de speakerdraden van de  
stroomkabel met de speakers verbindt, moet u de  
bedrading van de speakers in uw auto controleren.  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the  
power cord to the car battery; otherwise,  
the unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the  
power cord to the speakers, check the  
speaker wiring in your car.  
Lautsprecherleitungen des  
Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die  
Lautsprecher, die Lautsprecherverdrahtung in  
Ihrem Auto überprüfen.  
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
L
L
L
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
-
R
R
R
-
-
-
TROUBLESHOOTING  
FEHLERSUCHE  
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.  
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen  
richtig angeschlossen?  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
PROBLEMEN OPLOSSEN  
• The fuse blows.  
• Le fusible saute.  
• De zekering slaat door.  
* Are the red and black leads connected  
correctly?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés  
correctement?  
* Zijn de rode en de zwarte draden op de juiste  
manier aangesloten?  
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet  
werden.  
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous  
tension.  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
• De stroom kan niet worden ingeschakeld.  
* Is de gele draad aangesloten?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• Er komt geen geluid uit de speakers.  
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad kortgesloten?  
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.  
• Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung  
kurzgeschlossen?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Het geluid wordt vervormd.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers  
grounded in common?  
• Le son est déformé.  
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad geaard?  
* Zijn de “–” polen van de linker- en de  
rechterspeakers gemeenschappelijk geaard?  
• Ton verzerrt.  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit  
sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die (–) Anschlußklemmen der linken und  
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the  
car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
• Geluid wordt door ruis gestoord.  
* Is de aarde-aansluiting achter met gebruik van  
kortere en dikkere snoeren met het chassis van de  
auto verbonden?  
• Interférence avec les sons.  
• Störgeräusche im Klang.  
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle  
connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un  
cordon court et épais?  
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren  
und dickeren Kabeln an das Fahrzeugchassis  
angeschlossen?  
• Unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers  
grounded in common?  
• Het apparaat raakt verhit.  
• L’appareil devient chaud.  
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad geaard?  
* Zijn de “–” polen van de linker- en de  
rechterspeakers gemeenschappelijk geaard?  
• Gerät wird heiß.  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit  
sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die (–) Anschlußklemmen der linken und  
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?  
2
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
FRANÇAIS  
NEDERLANDS  
Typical Connections / Typische Anschlüsse / Raccordements typiques / Normale verbindingen  
A
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the  
vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may  
cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the  
connector from the car body may be different in Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des  
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im  
Fahrzeug sorgfältig überprüfen. Falsche  
Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am  
Gerät hervorrufen.  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez  
attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une  
connexion incorrecte peut endommager  
sérieusement l’appareil.  
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des  
connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent  
être différents en couleur.  
Alvorens de verbindingen tot stand te  
brengen: Moet u de bedrading in de auto  
zorgvuldig. Het apparaat kan door verkeerde  
verbindingen ernstige schade oplopen.  
De draden van het stroomsnoer verschillen mogelijk  
van kleur metde aansluitingen op het chassis van de  
auto.  
color.  
Anschlusses im Fahrzeug können sich farblich  
unterscheiden.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord  
in the order specified in the illustration  
below.  
1 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der  
Reihenfolge anschließen, wie in der  
Abbildung unten gezeigt.  
1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon  
d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur  
l’illustration ci-dessous.  
1 Verbind de gekleurde draden van het  
stroomsnoer in de afbeelding hieronder  
aangegeven volgorde.  
2 Connect the aerial cord.  
2 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.  
2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.  
2 Sluit de antenne aan.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Note: If your vehicle does not have any  
3 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.  
3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à  
3 Verbind de draadbundel daarna met het apparaat.  
accessory terminal, move the fuse from the  
fuse position 1 (initial position) to fuse position  
Hinweis: Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht über eine  
l’appareil.  
Opmerking: Als uw voertuig niet beschikt over  
Zubehöranschlußklemme, die Sicherung von der Remarque: Si votre véhicule ne possède pas de een aansluitklem, moet u de zekering verplaatsen  
2, and connect the red lead (A7) to the positive 1. Sicherungsposition (Erstposition) in die 2.  
(+) battery terminal.  
Sicherungsposition versetzen, die rote Leitung (A7) position de fusible 1 (position originale) à la  
• The yellow lead (A4) is not used in this case. an der (+) Batterieanschlußklemme anschließen. position de fusible 2 et connectez le fil rouge  
borne accessoire, déplacez le fusible de la  
van stand 1 (beginstand) naar stand 2 en moet u de  
rode draad (A7) met de pluspool (+) van de accu  
verbinden.  
• In dit geval wordt de gele draad (A4) niet gebruikt.  
• Die gelbe Leitung (A4) wird in diesem Fall  
(A7) à la borne positive (+) de la batterie.  
nicht verwendet.  
• Le fil jaune (A4) n’est pas utilisé dans ce cas.  
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram  
An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Diagramm  
Pour la télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme  
Naar stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (zie schema  
)
)
)
)
To SUBWOOFER (see diagram  
An SUBWOOFER (siehe Diagramm  
À SUBWOOFER (voir le diagramme  
)
)
)
Fuse position 2 / 2. Sicherungsposition / Position de fusible 2 / Zekering, stand 2  
Naar SUBWOOFER (zie schema  
)
Fuse position 1 / 1. Sicherungsposition /Position de fusible 1 / Zekering, stand 1  
Rear ground  
terminal  
Hintere  
Erdungscan–  
schlußklemme  
Borne arrière de  
masse  
Massaklem aan de  
achterkant  
15 A fuse  
1
15 A Sicherung  
Fusible 15 A  
Zekering 15 A  
*
*
*
*
Not included for this unit  
1
1
1
Ignition switch  
Zündschalter  
Interrupteur d’allumage  
Contactschakelaar  
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert  
Non fourni avec cet appareil  
Niet bij het apparaat inbegrepen  
Black  
Schwarz  
1
Noir  
*
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Zwart  
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Naar metalen ondergrond of chassis van de auto  
1
*
Line out (see diagram  
)
Schutz kappen Signalausgang  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock  
zum Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des  
Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)  
Yellow*2  
(siehe Diagramm  
Sortie de ligne  
(voir le diagramme  
Uitgang (zie schema  
)
Gelb*2  
Jaune *2  
Geel *2  
)
)
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la  
batterie de la voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage)  
(12 V constant)  
Naar een onder spanning staande aansluitklem in het zekeringblok die  
is aangesloten op de accu van de auto (u passeert de  
ontstekingsschakelaar) (constant 12 V)  
To CD changer/DAB tuner or another external  
component (see diagram  
An CD-Wechsler/DAB-Tuner oder andere externe  
Komponente (siehe Diagramm  
Au changeur de CD/tuner DAB ou à un autre  
appareil extérieur (voir le diagramme  
Naar CD-wisselaar/DAB-tuner of ander extern  
component (zie schema  
)
)
Fuse block  
Sicherungsblock  
Porte-fusible  
Red  
Rot  
Rouge  
Rood  
)
Zekeringblok  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
)
Naar een aansluitklem in het zekeringblok  
2
2
*
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to  
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power  
cannot be turned on.  
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts  
vor dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen  
werden, da sonst die Stromversorgung nicht  
eingeschaltet werden kann.  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant  
installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne  
peut pas être mis sous tension.  
Voordat u controleert of het apparaat werkt (alvorens het te  
installeren), moet deze draad aangesloten zijn. Als dit niet het  
geval is, kan de stroom niet worden ingeschakeld.  
Blue with white stripe  
Blau mit weißem Streifen  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
Blauw met witte streep  
*
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern  
vorhanden (max. 200 mA)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y  
en a une (200 mA max.)  
2
2
*
Naar afstandsdraad van andere apparatuur of antenne met circuit indien aanwezig  
(200 mA max.)  
Orange with white stripe  
Orange mit weißem Streifen  
Orange avec bande blanche  
Oranje met witte streep  
*
To car light control switch  
Zur Autolichtschalter  
(ILLUMINATION)  
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture  
Naar de schakelaar voor de autoverlichting  
Brown  
Braun  
Marron  
Bruin  
To cellular phone system  
Zur Mobiltelefon  
À un système de téléphone cellulaire  
Naar het mobiele-telefoonsysteem  
White with black stripe  
Weiß mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Blanc avec bande noire  
Wit met zwarte streep  
White Gray with black stripe  
Weiß Grau mit schwarzem  
Blanc Streifen  
Wit Gris avec bande noire  
Grijs met zwarte streep  
Gray Green with black stripe  
Grau Grün mit schwarzem  
Green Purple with black stripe  
Grün Lila mit schwarzem  
Vert Streifen  
Purple  
Lila  
Violet  
Paars  
Gris  
Grijs  
Streifen  
Vert avec bande noire  
Groen met zwarte streep  
Groen Violet avec bande noire  
Paars met zwarte streep  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Linkerspeaker (voorin)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Rechterspeaker (voorin)  
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Linkerspeaker (achterin)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
Rechterspeaker (achterin)  
3
Connections Adding Other Equipment / Anschlüsse zum Hinzufügen von anderer Ausrüstung / Raccordement pour ajouter d’autres appareils /  
Aansluitingen voor het toevoegen van andere apparatuur  
B
Amplifier / Verstärker / Amplificateur / Versterker  
You can connect an amplifier and other  
equipment to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white  
stripe) to the remote lead of the other  
equipment so that it can be controlled  
through this unit.  
Sie können einen Verstärker oder ein anderes  
Gerät anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage  
zu erweitern.  
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur et autre Het is mogelijk om uw autostereosysteem uit te  
appareil pour améliorer votre système autoradio. breiden met een versterker of andere apparatuur.  
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance  
(bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande  
à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il  
puisse être commandé via cet appareil.  
• Pour l’amplificateur seulement:  
– Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil  
et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez  
les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.  
– Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil  
est maintenu à un niveau élevé pour maintenir  
une qualité Hi-Fi pour les sons reproduits par  
cet appareil.  
• Verbind de afstandsdraad (blauw met witte streep)  
met de afstandsdraad van het andere apparatuur  
zodat deze op afstand vanaf deze apparaat kan  
worden bediend.  
• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit  
weißem Streifen) an das Fernbedienungskabel  
des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses  
Gerät gesteuert werden kann.  
• For amplifier only:  
• Alleen voor een versterker:  
– Disconnect the speakers from this unit,  
connect them to the amplifier. Leave the  
speaker leads of this unit unused.  
– The line output level of this unit is kept high  
to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced  
from this unit.  
• Nur für den Verstärker:  
– Koppel de speakers van dit apparaat los  
en verbind ze aan de versterker. Gebruik  
de speakerdraden van dit apparaat niet.  
– Het uitgangsniveau van het geluid is hoog om  
het hifi-geluid van deze eenheid te behouden.  
Wanneer u een extern apparaat op deze eenheid  
aansluit, moet u erop letten dat u de  
–
Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät  
abtrennen und am Verstärker anschließen.  
Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses Geräts  
unbenutzt lassen.  
– Der Ausgangspegel dieses Geräts wird auf  
einem hohen Wert gehalten, um den Hifi-  
Klang zu unterstützen, den dieses Gerät  
reproduziert.  
Wenn Sie einen externen Verstärker an  
dieses Gerät anschließen, stellen Sie den  
Verstärkungsregler des externen Verstärkers  
herunter, um die bestmögliche Leistung  
dieses Geräts zu erzielen.  
When connecting an external amplifier to  
this unit, turn down the gain control on the  
external amplifier to obtain the best  
performance from this unit.  
Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur  
extérieur à cet appareil, diminuez le réglage  
du gain sur l’amplificateur extérieur pour  
obtenir les meilleures performances de cet  
appareil.  
versterkingsfactor van de externe versterker laag  
houdt, zodat deze eenheid de beste prestaties  
levert.  
Rear speakers  
Remote lead  
Fernbedienungsleitung  
Fil d’alimentation à distance Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Afstandsbedieningsdraad Y-connector (wordt niet bij dit apparaat geleverd)  
Y-connector (not supplied with this unit)  
Y-Anschluß (nicht mit diesem Gerät mitgeliefert)  
*3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic  
body or to the chassis of the car—to the place  
not coated with paint (if coated with paint,  
remove the paint before attaching the wire).  
Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
*3 Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der  
Karosserie oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs.  
Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte  
die Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie  
den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie den  
Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter  
nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wird,  
kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.  
Hintere Lautsprecher  
Enceintes arrière  
Achterspeakers  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Verstärker  
JVC Amplificateur  
JVC Versterker  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
Signal cord  
(not supplied with this unit)  
Einzelleitung  
(nicht mit diesem Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Signaalkabel (wordt niet bij dit  
apparaat geleverd)  
Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem Streifen)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)  
Afstandsbedieningsdraad (Blauw met witte streep)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power  
aerial if any  
*3 Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse  
au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un  
endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il  
est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la  
peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut  
être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait  
KD-LH401  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der  
Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à  
l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une  
Naar afstandsdraad van andere apparatuur of antenne  
met circuit indien aanwezig  
Front speakers  
Vordere Lautsprecher  
Enceintes avant  
Voorspeakers  
correctement.  
3
You can connect another power amplifier for front speakers.  
Sie können einen anderen Leistungsverstärker für die vorderen Lautsprecher  
anschließen.  
Vous pouvez connecter un autre amplificateur de puissance pour les  
enceintes avant.  
*
Bevestig de aardedraad goed met een metalen  
onderdeel of het chassis van de auto—bevestig op  
een niet-gelakt gedeelte (indien gelakt, schuur dan  
af alvorens de draad te bevestigen). Het toestel kan  
worden beschadigd indien de aardedraad niet goed  
is aangesloten.  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Verstärker  
JVC Amplificateur  
JVC Versterker  
Front speakers  
Vordere Lautsprecher  
Enceintes avant  
Voorspeakers  
U kunt nog een eindversterker voor de voorspeakers aansluiten.  
CD changer and DAB tuner / CD-Wechsler und DAB-Tuner / Changeur CD et tuner DAB / CD-wisselaar en DAB-tuner  
Refer also to pages 56 and 63 of the INSTRUCTIONS.  
Connecting cord supplied for your DAB tuner or CD changer  
Verbindungskabel, das zum Lieferumfang des DAB-Tuners oder CD-Wechslers gehört  
Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre tuner DAB ou changeur CD  
Siehe auch Seiten 56 und 63 in der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.  
Référez-vous aussi à les pages 56 et 63 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.  
Zie tevens bladzijden 56 en 63 van de GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING.  
Verbindingskabel die met de DAB-tuner of CD-wisselaar wordt meegeleverd  
Connecting cord supplied for your DAB tuner  
Verbindungskabel, das zum Lieferumfang des DAB-  
Tuners gehört  
Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer  
Verbindungskabel, das zum Lieferumfang des  
CD-Wechsler gehört  
Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre tuner DAB  
Verbindingskabel die met de DAB-tuner wordt meegeleverd  
Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre changeur CD  
Verbindingskabel die met de CD-wisselaar wordt meegeleverd  
JVC DAB tuner  
DAB-Tuner von JVC  
Tuner DAB JVC  
JVC DAB-tuner  
or  
oder  
ou  
JVC CD changer  
CD-Wechsler von JVC  
Changeur CD JVC  
JVC CD-wisselaar  
of  
KD-LH401  
JVC DAB tuner  
DAB-Tuner von JVC  
Tuner DAB JVC  
JVC CD changer  
CD-Wechsler von JVC  
Changeur CD JVC  
JVC CD-wisselaar  
CAUTION / VORSICHT / PRECAUTION / LET OP!:  
• Before connecting the CD changer and/or the DAB tuner, make sure that the unit is  
turned off.  
JVC DAB-tuner  
KD-LH401  
• Bevor Sie den CD-Wechsler und/oder den DAB-Tuner anschließen, vergewissern  
Sie sich, daß das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.  
• You can connect both components in series as illustrated above.  
• Es ist möglich, beide Komponenten in einer Serienschaltung entsprechend der obigen Darstellung  
anzuschließen.  
• Vous pouvez connecter les deux appareils en série comme montré ci-dessus.  
• Beide apparaten zijn volgens bovenstaande illustratie in serie aan te sluiten.  
• Avant de connecter le changeur CD et/ou le tuner DAB, s’assurer que l’unité est  
éteinte.  
• Zorg ervoor dat de apparaat is uitgeschakeld alvorens u de CD-wisselaar en/of DAB-tuner  
aansluit.  
External Component / Externe Komponente / Appareil extérieur / Extern apparaat  
Subwoofer / Subwoofer / Caisson de grave / Subwoofer  
KS-U57 *4  
Signal cord (not supplied with this unit)  
Einzelleitung (nicht mit diesem Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
External component  
L
L
L
L
Externe Komponente  
Appareil extérieur  
Extern apparaat  
R
R
R
R
KD-LH401  
Signaalkabel (wordt niet bij dit apparaat geleverd)  
Subwoofer  
Subwoofer  
Caisson de grave  
Subwoofer  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
CD changer jack  
Einzelleitung (nicht mit diesem Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Signaalkabel (wordt niet bij dit apparaat geleverd)  
Buchse für CD-Wechsler  
Prise du changeur CD  
Aansluiting voor CD-wisselaar  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Verstärker  
JVC Amplificateur  
JVC Versterker  
L
L
KD-LH401  
4
*
*
*
*
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied with this unit)  
R
R
4
4
4
Line-Eingangsadapter KS-U57 (nicht mit diesem Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (wordt niet bij dit apparaat geleverd)  
SUBWOOFER  
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Connexion de la télécommande de volant /  
C
Verbinden met de stuurwiel-afstandsbediening  
OE remote adapter (not supplied)  
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this receiver using the  
controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.  
Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.  
Steering wheel remote input  
Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung  
Entrée de la télécommande de volant Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)  
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption  
(nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten)  
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver  
steuern. Hierfür ist ein für Ihr Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von JVC (nicht  
im Lieferumfang enthalten) erforderlich. Für weitere Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC  
Autoradiohändler.  
Ingang stuurwiel-afstandsbediening  
Adapter voor stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (niet bijgeleverd)  
Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant  
la télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni) correspondant  
à votre voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.  
Indien uw auto een stuurwiel-afstandsbediening heeft, kunt u deze receiver met die afstandsbediening bedienen.  
Hiervoor heeft u echter een JVC adapter (niet bijgeleverd) nodig die geschikt is voor de stuurwiel-afstandsbediening van  
uw auto. Raadpleeg uw JVC car audio dealer voor details.  
KD-LH401  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)  
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)  
Stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (in de auto)  
4

Bassworx BS Speakers BS693 User Manual
Baxi Potterton WH46 User Manual
Boss Audio Systems Car Stereo System 610C User Manual
Canon ELPH110HSSIL User Manual
Clarion RDX755Dz User Manual
Escient VISION M51003 02A7 User Manual
Harman Stove Company SF160 User Manual
Hypertec Making IT Perform N15848KHY User Manual
Jabra A330 User Manual
JVC CS HX7 User Manual